JP2019005188A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a player toward games.SOLUTION: A state is at least set by changing between a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter first ball entrance means than to second ball entrance means and a special state in which the game ball becomes more likely to enter the second ball entrance means than to the first ball entrance means. If the special state is set, as a cancellation condition with which the special state is to be cancelled, it is so configured that each of a dynamic display number of times of identification information corresponding to a first determination and a dynamic display number of times of identification information corresponding to a second determination can be separately set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If it is a win, a game that executes a win game is known.

JP 2012-147965 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a problem that a player gets bored early.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means. Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball entering the ball means or the second ball input means, and based on the game ball entering the first ball input means by the information acquisition means The first determination is executed based on the information acquired in the above, and the player is made to perform the first determination based on the information acquired based on the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means. An advantageous determination means for executing the second determination, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and the specific display result for indicating the determination result A privilege granting means for granting a privilege when the identification information is stopped and displayed; A normal state in which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a game ball that enters the second ball entry means rather than the first ball entry means. A state setting means capable of switching at least a special state that makes it easy to make a ball, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, a release condition for releasing the special state As described above, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be individually set. is there.

  A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, wherein the determination means is information stored in the storage means. Among them, the information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the second entry means has been entered is preferentially determined.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is based on the fact that in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, when the special state is set, a gaming ball enters the second entry means in the storage means. It has a regulation means which makes it difficult to memorize the information acquired in this way.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the release condition is that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to the second determination. More than the number of dynamic display times of the corresponding identification information.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, the second entrance means different from the first entrance means, the first entrance means or the first entrance means. Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the two ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquired based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means A first determination is performed based on the information, and a second advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Determination means for executing determination, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating that the determination result is specific to be stopped And a privilege granting means for granting a privilege when the second input A normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than a first means, and a special state in which a game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. State setting means that can be set by switching at least, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special condition is canceled and the first determination corresponds to the release condition. The identification information dynamic display count and the identification information dynamic display count corresponding to the second determination can be individually set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, it has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means is based on the fact that the information entered in the storage means has entered the second entry means. Thus, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is preferentially determined. Therefore, since the second determination that is advantageous to the player is performed with priority, there is an effect that the advantageous determination can be continuously executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. In other words, when the special state is set, the storage means has a restricting means that makes it difficult to store information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means. Therefore, when the special state is set, the first determination can be easily performed before the second determination, and there is an effect that the game ball can be allowed to enter the second entrance means during that time.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the release condition is configured such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is larger than the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the situation where the second determination is not executed can be suppressed by executing the first determination.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball | bowl flow in the right side area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball | bowl flow in the right side area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement relationship between the storage apparatus provided in the game board of the pachinko machine, and a non-electrical accessory. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the internal structure of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 650. FIG. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hitting game of the small hit type B which is executed based on the entrance of the ball to the 1st entrance, (b) is the 1st entrance It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit type A of small hit type game which is executed based on the entrance of the ball to (A) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit game performed based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance, (b) is based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the jackpot game which is executed. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart (the first half) which shows the relationship between the game state in 1st Embodiment, and an effect state. It is a timing chart (latter half) which shows the relationship between the game state in 1st Embodiment, and an effect state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the gaming state is a short-time state and the first special symbol variation starts, and (b) is a game It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is a short-time state and 40 seconds have passed since the first special symbol change was started. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus after a game state is a short time state, and a ball | bowl entered the 2nd entrance during the fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol. (B) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time of a game state being a time-short state, and the fluctuation | variation period of a 1st special symbol remaining 1 second. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time of the fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol performed during the time-shortening state stopped, (b) It is the figure which was an ordinary state, and showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the time of the change of the 2nd special symbol being started. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of the normal state after completion | finish of a time-short state, and the fluctuation | variation of the 2nd special symbol elected small hit being stopped display, (B) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus when a big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in Fig.18 (a). (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the second jackpot game is started by the short time variation performed after the jackpot game by V winning is completed, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is a short time state and the variation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device when the game state is a short-time state, and the second special symbol is stored on hold due to the ball entering the second entrance during the battle effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen, (b) is the state of 3rd symbol display apparatus in case a game state is a time-short state and a ball does not enter the 2nd entrance during a battle production. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is a short-time state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired to the upper limit during the short-time fluctuation of the first special symbol. (B) is a bonus effect being executed when the gaming state is a short-time state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired to the upper limit during the short-time fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case a game state is a normal state, and the small hit game based on a 1st special symbol is performed, (b) These are the schematic diagrams which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the small hit game shown to Fig.22 (a). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of performing a right-handed game while the game state is a normal state (left-handed state), (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the state in which the accessory is open | released. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st per random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the special symbol 1 random number table in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, (d) is the contents of the second per random number table in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the special symbol 1 big hit selection table in 1st Embodiment typically. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 big hit selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting type selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical about the content of the special symbol 1 small hitting selection table in 1st Embodiment. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 small hits selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 jackpots in 1st Embodiment typically. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 removal in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the special figure in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1 small hits. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 time reduction in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production | presentation state selection table, (b) is each production state selected by the production | presentation state selection table, and the 3rd symbol displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship with 3 symbols and a holding | maintenance symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the universal prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit | end completion process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory opening / closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage apparatus control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information relevant process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the common figure display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the specific effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is done. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 time reduction in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short time end discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short time fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-short state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change time setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven accessory. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the other effect example 1, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the other effect example 1. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the other effect example 2, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the other effect example 2. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for general drawings in other production examples 2, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the normal fluctuation pattern table in other production examples 2. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time reduction A in other production example 2, (d) is the fluctuation for time reduction B in other production example 2. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the pattern table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the other production example 2.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are areas on the right side of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the non-electrical accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the second variable prize-winning device 650 provided in FIG. 7, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  The inner frame 12 shows a large number of nails, a left first entrance 64a, a right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b). Is referred to as a first entrance 64.), a second entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), etc. 2) is detachably mounted from the front side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate are set on the side where the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, the ball launch unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing during the pressing operation period, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a sphere launched by the sphere launch unit 112a, or the solenoid of the sphere launch unit 112a is provided. It may be configured to detect that a sphere has been fired. Alternatively, the number of detected spheres may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  A frame button 22 is provided on the upper part of the lower dish unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later. In this way, by arranging the frame buttons 22 that can be operated by the player in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to arbitrarily select an effect executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is increased. Can be increased.

  In this embodiment, a frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. However, other configurations may be used. Or a sensor-type operation means for detecting that the player is approaching, a lever-type operation means that the player can operate in the left-right (or front-rear) direction, and a handle-type operation means that the player can rotate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of operation means is one, but it may be more than that, or a plurality of operation means of different operation methods may be provided. With this configuration, the player can perform more various operations, and the types of effects performed based on the player's operations on the operation means can be increased.

  The operation means (the frame button 22) is disposed at a position where the player can operate the game (operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand) (upper left side of the lower plate unit 15). Therefore, even when the player is playing a game, the frame button 22 can be easily operated.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, a variable prize device (first variable prize device 65, second variable prize device 650), a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. 12 is attached to the back side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable prize device (the first variable prize device 65, the second variable prize device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is disposed in a through hole formed in the board 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or a winning port (entrance port).

  In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side in the front view of the game board 13) is formed as the left game area, the right side is formed as the right game area, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left game area (hereinafter referred to as In the left-handed game, a game in which a ball is entered into the general entrance 63 or the first left entrance 64a is performed, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) ), The fired ball passes over the variable display device unit 80, and the right first entrance 64b, the second entrance 640, the first variable prize device 65, the second are provided in the right game area. A game aimed at the variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the game is suppressed from becoming monotonous by causing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, short-time state, jackpot state, etc.) set. (Games) are different. Thereby, it is possible to change the contents of the game while grasping the current game state with respect to the player, and it is possible to further suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normally When passing the (entrance entrance) 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is won for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). Until it is released), and the release is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, it is determined that a special winning lottery that is different from the special gaming state is given to the player in a part of the case where it is determined that a bonus other than (hit) is determined by lottery of special symbols. It is configured. When the special symbol lottery is won in the small win, the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is set for a predetermined period (for example, until 1.8 seconds in total or 10 balls are won). The small hit game that is released is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10, a part of the ball that won the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the jackpot game described above is executed after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the player can win a jackpot based on the game results of a game that aims to win a big win in a special symbol lottery and a small hit game that is executed by winning a small bonus in a special symbol lottery. Both games that aim to be executed can be executed. Therefore, since the player can execute various games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of “big hit A” to “big hit G” as special jackpot types. Note that the two types of “bonus A, B” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed in the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of “hits C and D” are a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and the ball passes a specific area during the small hit game. Is a jackpot type that can be determined, and “Big Jack E” is a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 or when the ball enters the second It is a jackpot type that can be determined when a ball passes through a specific area during a lottery game when the ball passes through a specific area during the lottery game, which is triggered by having entered the ball opening 640, and “Big Jack F, G” Has entered the second entrance 640 Becomes small prize in the lottery is executed bets triggered a jackpot sphere can be determined if having passed through the specific area classification in the small win game. A plurality of jackpot types provided in this way are bonuses given to a player when a jackpot game is executed (for example, the number of rounds, opening time, opening action pattern), jackpot The privilege given after the game (for example, a privilege that gives a game state in which a player can easily win the next jackpot) is set differently. As a result, in the jackpot game executed at various opportunities for the player, it is possible to increase the willingness of the game to acquire a jackpot game to which a more advantageous privilege is given and to provide various game characteristics be able to.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (normal entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When the normal symbol is hit, the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position by changing the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. A normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 while the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol. In addition to being displayed by the display device 37, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 remains, a lottery of the next ordinary symbol is performed and according to the lottery. The variable display is started.

  As described above, there are seven types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack G”. “Big jackpots A to C” all have a special game state with 7 rounds (7 round jackpots), and “Big jackpot D” has a special game state with 2 rounds (2 round jackpots). If you get a big hit E, you get a special game state with 15 rounds (15 round big hit). When “Big Bonus F” is reached, a special game state with 5 rounds (5-round jackpot) is entered, and when “Big Bonus G” is reached, a special game state with 10 rounds (10 rounds jackpot) is entered.

  Also, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot EG are reached, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened after the jackpot is ended, and it is the second higher than the normal state at the time of winning the normal symbol. The short time state, which is a gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be released so that the ball can easily enter the entrance 640, is given until the special symbol variation is completed once (the short time number is once). . When “big hit B” and “big hit D” are reached, after the big hit, the above-mentioned short time state is not given and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time-saving function) for shifting the gaming state to a time-saving state in which it is easier to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. Has a special jackpot probability or a function to change the jackpot probability of a normal symbol (so-called probability variation function), but is not limited to this, using a pachinko machine having a probability variation function Also good.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. In addition, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at one normal symbol. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count to do. Also, in this embodiment, the bonus granted after the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. For example, the jackpot ends on the condition that the ball has passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. You may make it give the probability change state of a special symbol later, and the time-short state of a normal symbol later. Further, in the present embodiment, the time reduction state is configured to continue until the number of special symbol fluctuations is executed a predetermined number of times (one time). 10 times), and when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the number of time reductions, or when the special symbol lottery results in a specific lottery result, the time reduction state may be terminated. Also, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (lottery for determining whether or not the short-time state is continued) is executed, and the short-time state is terminated when the lottery result does not continue the short-time state. May be. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured that a short-time state is always given after the jackpot game by a specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot EG), but other configurations may be used. For example, there is provided a time application number measurement means for measuring the number of times that the time reduction state is continuously applied, and when the measurement result by the time application number measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), which jackpot Even if the jackpot game according to the type is executed, the short time state may not be given after the jackpot game ends. Thereby, the upper limit of the game period in which the player is advantageous can be set, and it is possible to suppress providing excessive gambling to the player. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive euphoria, an example was shown in which an upper limit was set for the number of times that the time-short state was continuously given. You may make it provide an upper limit in the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of the special symbol performed during a consecutive resort period). Even in the case of such a configuration, an upper limit can be set for the time-shortage period period, so that excessive euphoria can be suppressed. In this case, the upper limit is not set for the number of times that the time-short state is given (that is, the number of jackpots during the time-shortage period), so the limited period (the time-shortage period where the upper limit is set) During this, the player can be motivated to play a lot of jackpots.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to four times for each entrance, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may set so that it may hold | maintain until the number which totaled the number of entrance to a some entrance is the upper limit number (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are being hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a special corresponding to the jackpot type (big hit A to G) A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general entrances 63 through which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) using that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the ordinary symbol.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 uses the third symbol display device 81 to change the target of the symbol (main symbol) for informing the player of the change display in an easy-to-understand manner according to the gaming state and the like. It is configured as follows. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is granted is determined based on a lottery result of a special symbol in one gaming state (for example, a normal state) This is because the game state (for example, the short-time state) is configured to be determined based on the normal symbol lottery result. In this way, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complex game characteristics, the player can switch the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the special symbol or the normal symbol, thereby allowing the player to Only a change display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 needs to be watched, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110, the display related to the special symbol is performed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display related to the normal symbol is performed on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 and the display of the 2nd symbol display device 83. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to move. Here, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the left (left side display) shows the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol (depending on the gaming state) which is one of the third symbols in the first display area Dm. Three symbol rows are displayed: area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right display area Dm3). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols. These symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A symbol or a normal symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

  Note that the third symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of the main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a specific lottery result (a big win or a part of a small win for a special symbol, a win for a normal symbol). In such a case, the same 3rd symbol (main symbol) is arranged (for example, “777”) and the variable display is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  In the upper right area of the first display area Dm, second display areas Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) are formed. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area where a symbol string indicating a first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area where a symbol string indicating a second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol string indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

  The second display area Dn also displays the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area where the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area where the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of reserved symbols of normal symbols is displayed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of reserved memories of each symbol are the second symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (the symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as the main symbol, and the other symbols are less conspicuous than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. Thereby, the player can execute an optimal game only by confirming the display content of the main symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the sub symbol is made smaller than the main symbol to make it less noticeable than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, display of the main symbol You may comprise so that a subordinate symbol may become difficult to distinguish from a main symbol by making the transmittance | permeability of the subordinate symbol display mode higher than an aspect, or moving the display area of a subordinate symbol.

  In addition, as the symbol sequence form of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol sequence displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or “○” as shown in FIG. ”And“ × ”are displayed in two rows in parallel, and when two“ ○ ”symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol is hit. It may be configured to notify the player that it was.

  Furthermore, it may be configured not to display the subordinate symbol corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81, or display the subordinate symbol at a place other than the third symbol display device 81. May be.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1 main symbol Dma) is displayed in the first display area Dm (Fig. 9B). )), When the gaming state is the short-time state, the main symbol corresponding to the normal symbol (ordinary main symbol Dmc) is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16A). Further, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the main symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd) is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the gaming state (FIG. 2). 17 (b)).

  Further, although detailed description will be given later, in each gaming state, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied (for example, when a normal symbol that started to change during the time-shortening state variably stops after the time-shortening state ends) A combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the subordinate symbol described above is displayed. Thereby, the display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be performed, without giving a discomfort to a player with respect to the symbol fluctuation | variation performed so that different game states may be straddled. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed as subordinate symbols in the second display area Dn, and the pseudo-design for production is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol (see FIG. 22A). It is configured as follows. Thereby, in the period (for example, small hit period) in which each symbol is not variably displayed, it is possible to make the player think that the symbol variation is being executed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display form consisting of numbers from “0” to “9”, but is distinguished from other main symbols. As long as it is a possible display mode, a display mode other than numbers may be used. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining characters and numbers may be used. In addition, as a symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the first display area Dm, even if the symbols other than the main symbol (that is, the same symbols are stopped on the active line L1) are stopped, no bonus is given to the player. A symbol string including a sub-symbol may be used as the symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol or a normal symbol performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) to be described later is a win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned. The jackpot is generated after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and this stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the win (special symbol, normal symbol lottery result) It is possible to suppress oversight of whether or not is a hit. In the stop display state described above, only the main symbols that are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 are displayed, and other main symbols (the main symbols set in each symbol row, other than the effective lines L1). It is preferable not to display the main symbols that are stopped and displayed at the points (display them inconspicuously). Thereby, the stop display result of the main symbol can be more clearly notified to the player.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when there is no reserved ball and the main symbol (3rd symbol) of the combination corresponding to the special symbol or normal symbol is stopped for 1 second, the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed after that Will continue. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new main symbol change is started. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the demonstration effect may be configured to start based on the elapsed time since all the symbols are stopped and displayed regardless of the main symbol and the subordinate symbols. You may comprise so that the display mode of an effect may differ with the demonstration effect in the case where only the symbol is stopped and the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the secondary symbol are stopped. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect that is executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification that prompts the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the subsidiary symbol are stopped and displayed, It is good to perform the alerting | reporting for encouraging the game by a player. Thereby, a game can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the sub display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area in which an auxiliary display mode for assisting a player's game such as a game situation and a game description is displayed corresponding to each game state and game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9B), or the contents of the variation effect of the main symbol being executed in the first display area Dm are assisted. (See FIG. 22 (a)), guide the contents of the game to be played (see FIG. 22 (b)), or display the remaining period of a specific period (short time period) that is advantageous to the player (see FIG. 22). 15 (a)). Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first left entrance 64a through which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the left first entrance 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first left entrance 64a is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The left first entrance 64a played a right-handed game when a ball was launched to the left path of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than the case.

  A storage device 750 and a specific general entrance 630 are disposed below the first left entrance 64a. The detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but the storage device 750 includes a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and a storage valve 750a in a closed state. It is comprised from the side wall for forming the storage area which can store one bulb | ball. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled so as to change from a closed state in which a ball can be stored in a special symbol lottery in a lottery to an open state, and when it is variably operated to an open state, The sphere (or the sphere that flows into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is changed to the open state) flows down to the lower side of the storage device 750. Note that the storage device 750 is disposed at a location where a ball can be stored both when a left-handed game is performed and when a right-handed game is performed.

  A specific general entrance 630 is disposed below the storage device 750 so that a ball that has passed through the storage device 750 can enter. The specific general entrance 630 is a winning entrance from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and is used as an opportunity to operate the non-electrical accessory 710. The detailed description of the non-electrical accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but the non-electric mechanism 710 a is activated by the weight of the ball that has entered the specific general entrance 630, The provided non-electric accessory 710 is configured to change to a position where a ball can enter the right first entrance 64b.

  On the other hand, on the right side area of the game board 13, two flow paths through which the right-handed game flows down, and a sorting member 700 for distributing the balls fired by the right-handed game to the two paths described above, A non-electrical accessory 710, a right first entrance 65b, a through gate 67, a second entrance 640 and an electrical accessory 640a, a first variable winning device 65, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided. It is arranged. Next, with reference to FIGS. 2-4, the structure of the right side area | region of the game board 13 of this pachinko machine 10 is demonstrated.

  The balls launched by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the sorting member 700. The sphere distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640, and flows out downward in the right region. In addition, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-electrically-powered accessory 710 provided on the downstream side is in a closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, it flows into the inflow port 704a and flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back surface side (the back side in FIG. 2) of the first flow path 701, and the right region on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. It flows out downward. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in an open state (see FIG. 5B), it flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first entrance 64b. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Note that a detailed description of the non-electrical accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but in the present embodiment, a ball that has entered the right first entrance 64b when the non-electrical accessory 710 is open. It is configured that the non-electrically-operated accessory 710 can be changed to a closed state by its own weight.

  Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge below the right region, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 are over. , And flows into the out port 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

  Here, the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a sphere flow when a sphere fired by a right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701. FIG. 4 shows a sphere fired by a right-handed game by a second flow path. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball | bowl flow in the case of flowing down 702. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, when the sorting member 700 fires 100 balls per minute in order to alternately distribute the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702. Are distributed so as to flow down to the first channel 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds and to the second channel 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is constituted by a spherical passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) for one sphere, and the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced by a curved path 701a provided in the middle thereof. The sphere passage time until the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out of the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

  A through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the curved path 701 a), and a second entrance 640 is disposed downstream of the through gate 67. . The second entrance 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is closed, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is open. Is configured to enter the second entrance 640.

  The sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although details will be described later, since the variation time of the normal symbol executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball passing through the through gate 67 becomes the through gate 67. It is configured not to enter the second entrance 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed on the basis of the normal symbol lottery executed when the vehicle passes. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to physically make it impossible to execute a normal symbol lottery and enter a ball into the second entrance 640 simply by firing one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an inappropriate game from being executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game is divided into the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are disposed) and the second flow by the sorting member 700. Since it is alternately distributed to the road 702, the normal symbol lottery is executed (the ball is passed through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol lottery is won, and the electric accessory 640a is opened to open the second entrance. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to cause the ball to enter the 640, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game (for example, a single shot) that is more inappropriate.

  In this embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are disposed in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate is disposed in one of the flow paths. 67 may be provided, and the second entrance 640 may be provided in the other channel. With this configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the sorting member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths, the ball passes to the through gate 67. In addition, when a normal symbol is won, a game that allows a ball to enter the second entrance 640 can be restricted, and an illegal game can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the case where a sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 are fired next to the sphere. The ball that has flowed into the ball flows down the lower right region of the game board 13 (region where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are provided) almost simultaneously (approximately 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once in a gaming state (a big hit state or a small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (the fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4) of the first flow path 701, and viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). A plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball passages (area where the ball passage occupies the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704 c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second inlet 640), and the right side of the game board 13. In the lower region, the spheres are configured to flow out downstream from the spheres that have flowed out of the first flow path 701. As a result, the sphere that flows out of the outlet 704c vigorously (the sphere that flows out at a higher speed than the sphere that flows down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the sphere that flows out of the first flow path 701, and is irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a sphere flow occurs.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls launched by the right-handed game by the sorting member 700 are alternately distributed to the two flow paths, but other configurations may be used, for example, two Instead of alternating (1: 1) with respect to the flow paths, the spheres may be distributed at different ratios, or the spheres may be distributed with respect to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 is used in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. A split member may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of operation | movement of the storage apparatus 750 and the non-electric-powered article 710 used by this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing that the storage device 750 and the non-electrically-powered object 710 are both in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows that the thing 710 is all an open state (open state).

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), when the non-electrically-powered accessory 710 is in a closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to make a ball enter the right first entrance 64b. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to perform the right-handed game aiming at the right region of the game board 13 and to prevent the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b.

  The non-electrically-powered object 710 has an action part that abuts when the sphere passes a specific location, and the action part is operated by its own weight and is released based on the action. It is configured. Specifically, a ball that has entered the specific general entrance 630 comes into contact with the action portion described above, the action connection portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electrically-powered object 710 is released. As a result, a ball can enter the right first entrance 64b.

  Further, the right first entrance 64b is provided with a second action part on which the entered ball can come into contact, and when the ball comes into contact with the second action part, the weight of the contacted ball is reduced. As a result, the second action part is actuated to close the non-electrically-powered accessory 710. As described above, the non-electrically-powered object 710 is configured so that the variable state is switched based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using an electric drive source. The configuration of the non-electrically-powered object 710 may be other than the above-described configuration, and a known configuration may be used as a configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball.

  As described above, the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entrance 630 is used to enter the ball into the specific general entrance 630 that is an opportunity for operating (releasing) the non-electrical accessory 710. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. Then, as described above, when the predetermined release condition (for example, the start of jackpot game) is satisfied, the storage device 750 is in the release state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds elapses) is satisfied. It is variably controlled so that

  That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the big hit game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. And the storage apparatus 750 will be in a cancellation | release state, and the non-electric-powered accessory 710 will be open | released based on the ball | bowl having entered into the specific general entrance 630. FIG. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is disposed at a position where the ball launched by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game The ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game (the ball that passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds when the first variable winning device is temporarily closed) ) Can enter the specific general entrance 630.

  Therefore, during the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain both the payout of the winning ball based on the entering to the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the winning ball based on the entering to the specific general entrance 630. be able to. Furthermore, since the ball that could not win the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specific general entrance 630, the first variable during the jackpot game, which has conventionally been a waste ball, is made. An added value that is advantageous to the player can be given to a ball that has not won the winning device 65.

  In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is released so that the storage device 750 is released for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed). It is configured to be variably operated. Therefore, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round is established by satisfying the end condition of the first round in the jackpot game (for example, winning 10 balls) within 10 seconds (inter-round interval). ) Period and the period in which the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

  As a result, the ball that has passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the interval period between rounds can enter the specific general entrance 630, so the first round in the jackpot game is quick (within 10 seconds) ) Can play the game eagerly to finish.

  In addition, as the release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game, the release timing described above (after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed) for 10 seconds. ) May be set, or the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By configuring in this way, when the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released all coincide, The sphere can enter the specific general entrance 630.

  Further, when the above-described configuration is used, by adjusting the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied (for example, the tenth ball that is the end condition of the round is awarded to the first variable winning device) By adjusting the operation timing by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to vary the number of balls that enter the specific general entrance 630 during the big hit game, so that the big hit game is given to the player. It is possible to provide a new gameability in which the end timing of each round is matched with a predetermined timing (timing at which the storage device 750 is released), and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In addition, it is good to comprise so that the display aspect which alert | reports the cancellation | release timing of the storage apparatus 750 on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and the display aspect which a player can predict the timing when the interval between rounds is performed are good. Thereby, the player can execute the game in the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game is executed, the non-electrically-powered object 710 is in an open state (open state). Therefore, by performing a right-handed game during the jackpot game, A ball can be reliably entered into the entrance 64b. This makes it possible to reliably execute the variation of the first special symbol in the short-time state that shifts after the jackpot game ends (the short time at the start of the extended play mode that shifts from the big hit in the normal state (short time at first time)).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the non-electrically-powered object 710 operates so as to shift to the closed state (closed state) when one ball enters the right first entrance 64b, the big hit It is possible to suppress excessive balls from entering the right first entrance 64b during the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the structure in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e in the second variable prize winning device 650 are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 650e1 and a special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later. Will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the balls won in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge channel 650e1, and FIG. 6B shows the second variable winning device 650. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state by which the winning ball | bowl is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is operated, the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. In the present embodiment, a stay member 650n is provided in the special discharge channel 650e2. With this staying member 650n, it is possible to retain only one game ball in the sorting destination area 650h3, which is the area where the game ball is sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2 by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball stays in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2, It will flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1.

  The stay member 650n is configured by a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. This staying member 650n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the staying solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). This staying member 650n can advance one game forward (close operation), thereby retaining one game ball in the sorting destination area 650h3. On the other hand, by performing a retreat operation (opening operation) backward, the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

  Here, the second variable winning device 650 allows a game ball to enter by opening the open / close door 650f1 during the small hit game. Further, the staying member 650n is closed during the small hit game (when the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (new to the second variable winning device 650). After the predetermined time has elapsed since the ball could not be entered), the opening operation is performed. In other words, in this control example, the game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 650 are limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which flows down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 becomes excess.

  The game ball that has flowed down to the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, a jackpot game is configured based on the passing of the game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

  In the first embodiment, the number of game balls that flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 is limited to one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be limited may be changed as appropriate by enabling the stay member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

  With reference to FIG. 6A, a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 650e1 will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inoperative and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. .

  In the first embodiment, the stay member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 operates even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 9209c is activated, so that design cost and program capacity can be reduced.

  When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2, there is no influence by the stay member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the flow of the small hit game in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 10A shows a small hitting game of a small hitting type B executed based on the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (left first ball inlet 64a, right first ball inlet 64b). FIG. 10 (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the sphere, and is executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and FIG. 11B shows the second entrance 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game performed based on the ball | bowl entering into a ball. Details of operation control of the various apparatuses shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, when winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hit game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and the small hit game ends when a ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The jackpot game is configured to be executed later. When winning a small hit in this first special symbol lottery, the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game (easy to pass) Any one of the small hits (small hit type B) where the ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the first special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, the first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing is executed for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. In addition, the time of the 1st special symbol fluctuation effect performed by the display control apparatus 114 is mentioned later. When the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hitting control (when the small hitting game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for variably operating, the stagnation solenoid 209b for variably operating the stagnation member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V-inlet solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation of turning off for 15 seconds and turning on for 0.5 seconds twice after the small hit game is executed, and then turns off for 15 seconds and 0.8 seconds. An open scenario of a total of 60 seconds is set so as to be in the on state and the off state for 13.2 seconds.

  Next, the retention solenoid 209b is turned on for 55 seconds (a state where the ball is retained) after the small hit game is executed, and then turned off for a period of 5 seconds (a state where the retention of the ball is released). A second opening scenario is set. The opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b described above is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

  On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured such that different opening scenarios are set depending on the type of small hit, and the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) (it is difficult to pass). In the small hit type B, which is the type, an open scenario is set in which the off state continues for 60 seconds during the small hit game period (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hit type, an open scenario is set in which the small hit game is executed, which is in an off state for 40 seconds, an on state for 15 seconds, and an off state for 5 seconds (FIG. 10). (See (b)).

  In this way, by changing only the driving operation of one solenoid among the three solenoids driven during the small hit game, the ball easily passes through the specific region (V winning switch 650e3). By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game where it is difficult for the ball to pass, it is possible to use a common open scenario for the small hit game executed in different small hit types, and to reduce the processing load. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is made common, and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is changed according to the small hit type, but other configurations may be used. For example, the opening scenario of the stay solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209C may be made common, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be made different. In this case, a common open scenario is set so that a period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a period during which the ball cannot pass are set according to the timing at which the ball has won the second variable winning device 650. As an opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, an opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on in correspondence with a period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), and a specific area (V An open scenario may be used in which the winning switch 650e3) is made to correspond to a period during which the ball cannot pass and the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. Further, in any open scenario, the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on may be unified. With this configuration, it is possible to match up to the number of balls that can be won in the second variable winning device 650.

  Further, as in the above-described example, the opening scenario is not different only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, but the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is made different even when the same opening scenario is used. Thus, a small hit game in which a ball easily passes through and a small hit game in which a ball does not easily pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) may be configured to be executable. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a different open scenario for each small hit type, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, the flow of the small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 will be described. In the present embodiment, the small winning game is executed based on the entrance of the ball to the second entrance 640 (that is, the prize is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2)). The small hit game executed based on the game is configured so that the same operation control is executed, and therefore, the description will be made without limiting the type of the small hit.

  In FIG. 11 (a), description will be made with the time for the entire small hit control (the small hit game time) set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit game (control) is started, among the plurality of solenoids described above, the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned off and the open / close door 650f1 is closed. When the open / close door 650f1 is closed, a new ball does not win in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209b is turned off, the staying member 650n is opened (retracted), and the ball stayed by the staying member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the ball existing in the second variable prize winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 when the set time t1 elapses. Only the ball retained by the retaining member 650n in the 2 variable winning device 650 will flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. Next, the set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to cause the sphere flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

  In this way, even when the ball is retained by the stay member 650n within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 by driving the stay solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference, the guide piece 650h2 and the stay member 650n Since it can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 without interference with the retained sphere, the apparatus can be made compact.

  Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

  Next, differences from FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 11B, since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second entrance 640 is a big win (per symbol), the operation of the second variable winning device 650 is not performed. That is, the big hit control is started after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main controller 110 is completed. Meanwhile, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is being varied.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the effect time performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. In FIG. 11 (a), the sum of the variation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11 (b), the variation time of the second special symbol. Is set to 12 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning or per symbol, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (first specific winning prize). This is because the opening timing of the mouth 65a) is matched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol and to entertain the effect executed by the display control device to the end.

  Next, a game flow in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is roughly the normal state, the left-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entrance 64a and the gaming state is in the short-time state. In this case, when the second special symbol (special 2) is drawn by aiming at the second entrance 640, or when the gaming state is a win (big hit, small win) state, the first variable winning device 65, the second 2 Right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650 is performed, and the winning of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game is won (big hit or small win) and the winning game ends When the short-time state is given later, the game shifts to the right-handed game (the continuous game mode) and shifts to the specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This extended game mode (specific game state) ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol becomes 0), and the normal state It shifts to the left-handed game that is. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), the game is performed with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the extended game mode (specific game state), a game is played with the aim of continuing the extended game mode (specific game state). In this way, in gaming machines having different game characteristics, by making the different game characteristics correspond to games (right-handed game, left-handed game) in which the position at which the player launches the ball is different, An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the first special symbol wins a big win as an opportunity to shift from the normal state where the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state where the right-handed game is performed (renzo mode). Multiple (two types) of wins and winnings that the first special symbol wins and wins a special hit (V winning switch 650e3) through the specified area (V winning switch 650e3) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage during the left-handed game, which is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed, a game aimed at the first left entrance 64a is executed. When the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first left entrance 64a, and the jackpot type of the lottery result is a jackpot A (80% at the time of the jackpot winning), after the jackpot ends A short-time gaming state (short-time state) that facilitates winning at the second entrance 640 is given. When the time-short game state (time-short state) is entered, a right-handed game in which a right-handed game is performed in which a ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640 disposed in the right area of the game board 13. Done. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% of when the jackpot is won), the short-time gaming state (short-time state) is not given after the jackpot is over, so the normal gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game ends ( (Normal state). Further, in the present embodiment, there is a route that becomes a big win (V prize) when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is a small hit A (10% at the time of winning a small win). . In this case, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state after the jackpot. Even if the small hit type is small hit A, if the ball could not pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or if the winning small hit type When is a small hit B, there is no transition to the short-time game state (short-time state), and the shift to the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed.

  Next, the flow during the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, the right first entrance 64b is disposed in the right area of the game board 13, and the right hit game is executed. At least one sphere is configured to enter the right first entrance 64b. In other words, in a normal gaming state (normal state), when winning a jackpot that is given a short-time state after the jackpot game ends, at least one reserved memory of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is stored after the jackpot game ends. The time saving state is started in a state where the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is not stored.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the present pachinko machine 10, when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) exist, the second special symbol The lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved memory (special figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called special 2 priority fluctuation), but the second special symbol (special figure 2) is reserved. In the absence, a lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is executed. Here, since the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the time reduction state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, the time reduction state is started. For 150 seconds, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is being changed. In addition, when a change (lottery) of any special symbol (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is executed once during the short-time state, the termination condition for the short-time state is satisfied ( 1 time reduction).

  During the period in which the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is fluctuating in the short-time state, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed, and the second special symbol ( It is possible to obtain a maximum of four reserved memories of special figure 2). Here, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be acquired, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped after the time reduction ends, and after the transition to the normal state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol is stored. A lottery based on this is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a jackpot with a probability of 1/300, and to win a jackpot with a probability of 299/300. 2 Bonus winnings by lottery of special symbols, a small hit game that allows a ball to pass (easy to pass) to a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, and all jackpots executed when winning V are all A jackpot is set in which a short-time state is given after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as long as the second special symbol is retained in the short-time gaming state, the extended game mode (specific gaming state) is continued.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the short-time state (during the consecutive resort preparation period), the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be acquired, and there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol When the time-short state is ended, the normal game state is shifted as it is, and the extended game mode (specific game state) is ended.

  In addition, if a plurality (for example, three) of reserved storage of the second special symbol is acquired during the consecutive house preparation period, the change of the second special symbol is started when entering the time-saving state again. Become. In the present embodiment, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol in the short time state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the variation time (3 seconds) of the normal symbol in the short time state. Therefore, the second special symbol holding memory is suppressed from being newly acquired during the short time state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is being executed. Thereby, the situation which provides an excessive prize ball to a player can be controlled. In the present embodiment, the time reduction state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90% once entering the time reduction state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the flow of the effect display content which changes corresponding to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the effect state in this embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in this embodiment.

  Here, the decoration design (3rd design) displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used for this embodiment is demonstrated easily. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is capable of displaying on the third symbol display device 81 decorative symbols (third symbol) corresponding to three kinds of symbols, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. Among them, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol that should most inform the player of the lottery result is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device as the main symbol. The decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbol is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device.

  Then, in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player can recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol. It is configured to make it easy to understand complex gameplay.

  The control for switching the symbol displayed as the main symbol described above will be described in detail later. However, the value of the effect state is set based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the variation state of each symbol. Based on the above, the symbol displayed as the main symbol and the symbol displayed as the subsidiary symbol are switched and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, “state 1” is set as the effect state. During the period in which “state 1” is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the normal symbol is displayed as the subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9 (b)). As described above, in the “normal (special 1)” state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is being executed, the player can easily display the lottery result of the first special symbol. The contents of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, in the “hit” state where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game is being executed, in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9B). A jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, “-” is set as the effect state.

  In the “short time (special 1)” state in which the game state shifts to the short time state after the jackpot game is over and the first special symbol variation is executed, the effect state is “state 3” based on the variation state of the normal symbol. "Or" state 5 "is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the “time saving (special 1)” state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game state is “short time (special 1)”, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (normal symbol lottery is executed), and the normal symbol is won (per symbol) It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

  That is, when the game state is the “short time (special 1)” state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol that has started to change during the time reduction state stops changing during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since it is set to be an open pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player, the usual figure change starts when the game state is not in the short-time state (for example, the big hit state), and it is electric during the short-time state When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the normal figure change starts during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a starts after the completion of the time reduction state (for example, the normal state), etc. The normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of the opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on the condition that the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state. In spite of the short-time state as described above, the electric symbol 640a will be displayed in the main symbol for the variation of the normal symbol in which the short circuit is opened, giving distrust to the player. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “time reduction (special 1)” state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is determined, the timing at which the normal symbol change is started, and the normal symbol change If the timing at which the power is stopped (when the winning combination is reached, the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened) is in the “short time (special 1)” state, ”Is set, and“ state 3 ”is set otherwise.

  During the period in which “state 5” is set as the production state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol as the secondary symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Is displayed (see FIG. 16A). As described above, in the “short time (special 1)” state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long period (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This allows the player to easily recognize the normal symbol lottery result and inform the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, during the period in which “state 3” is set as the production state, the pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. The third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16A). By comprising in this way, the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in a state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, regardless of the gaming state (regardless of the normal state or the short time state), “state 4” is set as the effect state. During the period in which “state 4” is set as the effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17B). As shown in FIG. 14, when “state 5” is set as the production state, when the lottery result of the first special symbol being changed is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the first When the remaining variation time of one special symbol is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period, “state 6” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which “state 6” is set as the performance state, the first special symbol is selected from the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol executed in “state 5” is the main symbol. The pseudo-design based on the result is variably displayed as the main design. By doing in this way, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. Therefore, from the state in which “state 5” is set and the variable display mode with the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started. The problem that the person is confused can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state transitions from “state 5” to “state 6” is the timing at which normal symbol variation is executed. Thereby, the transition of the production state can be performed without a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a specific effect for the small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When this gaming state is a normal state and a small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed, “state 2” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which “state 2” is set as the effect state, the pseudo-design that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is variably displayed as the main symbol in the special effect for small hits. Is done. In this case, the pseudo symbol displayed in a variable manner is a pseudo symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. In other words, the timing at which this pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a slotted eye) is displayed a predetermined period before the timing at which the second variable winning device 650 is released, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. When the ball that has been fired since then can be awarded to the second variable 650, the player can feel that the second variable prize-winning device 650 has been released based on the fact that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. Executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a small hit game that is advantageous to the player (a ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3)), and disadvantageous The type of stop display mode of the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed during the small hit game is set according to the type of the small hit game being executed. For example, as a pseudo symbol stop display mode corresponding to the timing at which the second variable prize-winning device 650 is released at a timing when a ball can pass through a specific region, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific number (7)) Eye) is stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 from the pseudo-graphic variation display executed during the small hit game. You can entertain small hit games.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15-23, the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation status and holding status of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) Thus, display control is executed to vary the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine designed so that notable symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery) is different depending on the gaming state. It is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player simply by allowing the player to grasp the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An easy-to-understand game machine can be provided.

  FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the gaming state is the short-time state and the first special symbol (special Fig. 1) starts to change. is there. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game becomes a game that is advantageous to the player during the short-time state, and therefore guidance for guiding the game method in the guidance display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. “Right-handed” characters are displayed as the display. In the central portion of the first display area Dm, a universal main symbol Dmc whose main symbol is the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the normal symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, there is formed a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol as the main reserved symbol. In the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol is “0”.

  The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display region Dn3, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol, and the corresponding symbols are changing in the second display region Dn1 and the second display region Dn3. Therefore, the third symbol (subordinate symbol) is variably displayed, and the third symbol (subordinate symbol) for indicating that the corresponding symbol is not fluctuated in the second display area Dn2 is stopped.

  In addition, about the display mode of the subordinate symbol displayed on 2nd display area Dn1-Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether the corresponding symbol (a 1st special symbol, a 2nd special symbol, a normal symbol) is changing If it is. Moreover, as a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is only necessary to know that it has not changed (stopped). As shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. "May be displayed in a stopped manner, or the previous variation display may be stopped and displayed as it is.

  In the second display area Dn4, the number “3” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is 3, and in the second display area Dn5 The number “0” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (a state in which no reserved memory is acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the number “4” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of normal symbols is four.

  As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of reserved memories of each symbol is specifically shown as in this embodiment. You may use a display mode that shows numbers in numbers, or a display mode that shows only the presence or absence of reserved memory for each symbol (for example, “○” when there is a reserved memory, “−” when there is no reserved memory). It may be used. In this case, the number of reserved memories may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of “◯” indicating that there is reserved memory. A display mode that abstractly suggests the number of reserved memories may be used.

  The state shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a state in which the first special symbol is changed for a fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol is not changed. Therefore, the second display area Dn1 includes the first special symbol. The secondary symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed. In the second display area Dn2, “-” indicating that the secondary symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed.

  Further, in the sub display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, “150 seconds” is displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining time in the short time state, and the first sub display area Ds is displayed. In the second sub display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, “Countdown!” Is displayed as a guidance display for notifying the player that the remaining time in the short-time state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the short-time state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display the exact period until the time-short state is ended on the third symbol display device 81, and to allow the player to play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display to be displayed in the first sub display area Ds1, for example, a value with the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time-shortening state as an upper limit. May be set at random and displayed so that the value is subtracted.

  In this case, before the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period in FIG. 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is “???”. You may want to change the display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the short-time state will continue, and to play the game while always throbbing.

  FIG. 15 (b) shows a time point when the gaming state is a short-time state and 40 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol (special diagram 1) starts to change (from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a)). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the universal main symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (“555” display mode) for notifying that the winning symbol has been won in the normal symbol lottery, and the first display area Dm is displayed. A guidance display for notifying that a ball can be entered is displayed at the second entrance 640 at the lower right side of FIG.

  Further, “110 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the short time state in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, and a ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 in the second sub display area Ds2. “Charge time” indicating that the state is easy (the state in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to be opened long) is displayed. In the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("OO") is displayed to indicate that the normal symbol has been won.

  In this way, while the game state is in the short-time state and the fluctuation of special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) becomes the symbol that the player should pay most attention to. The usual lottery result is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, a display that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main symbol (Special Figure 1 Main Symbol, Special Figure 2 Main Symbol, Universal Figure Main Symbol, Pseudo Main Symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are as follows. Since the same stop-display mode (for example, glance) is also used for the same stop-display mode (for example, a glance) for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player. Even if the symbol that is the target of the symbol is changed in accordance with the game state, the player can perform the effect display (effect change display) without any sense of incongruity. The display position and display mode may be different for each main symbol, or the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player is different for each symbol. It may be allowed.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state after the game state is a short-time state and a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 at the upper center of the first display area Dm. “Charging completed” is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the drawing) indicating that the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol is “1” is displayed. In this state, in the second display area Dn5, the number “1” is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol is one.

  In the present embodiment, a single ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when the winning symbol is won in the short time and the electric accessory 640a is in a long open state. Elapsed 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) have elapsed since the operation of the ball or electric accessory 640a was started. In this figure, one ball enters the second entrance 640, Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the main symbol main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the center of the first display area Dm. Further, “100 seconds” is displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds as the remaining time in the short-time state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when one reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the short-time state is finished (after the fluctuation of the first special symbol being fluctuated), It is designed so that the fluctuation display of 2 special symbols is started and it is possible to acquire per symbol or per V prize with high probability. Furthermore, since the time-short state is always given after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol comes again. In addition, if a plurality of second special symbol hold memories are acquired in one short-time state (during the change of the first special symbol), the jackpot game corresponding to the acquired number is executed. Has been. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by displaying the “second special symbol hold memory” most expected by the player during the short-running state as the main hold symbol on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In this embodiment, as a display mode of the main reserved symbol, it is configured to be able to display a maximum of four “black circles” corresponding to the number of stored storage, but other configurations may be used, for example, In order to effectively notify whether or not the continuation mode is continued (whether or not the second special symbol is stored on hold), the display mode of the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved storage of the second special symbol is changed to another main hold. It may be different from the display mode of symbols. As a display mode in this case, the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is emphasized more than other main reserved symbols by changing the size, color, shape and pattern of the main reserved symbol. Only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved storage of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbols, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main reserved symbols are displayed may be changed. Further, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the fact may be notified by the sound output means or the light emitting means.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the gaming state is the short-time state and the variation period of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is 1 second remaining. In this state, a pseudo effect symbol that does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is displayed as the pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. The pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging state until the period when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes “0 second”). .

  This pseudo effect design is a timing when the game state is in the short-time state and the change of the normal symbol in which the fluctuation period exceeds the remaining short-time period is started (the timing when “state 3” is set as the effect state). It is what is displayed. By configuring in this way, when the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period exceeds the remaining short period is displayed as the main symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the main symbol main symbol Dmc is hit, Even when the display is stopped in the display mode, the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and gives the player distrust to the performance can be suppressed.

  In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining short time period is displayed as the main symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the main symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the short time state ends ( It may be possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if the display of the main symbol used to make the player pay attention to the display contents is changed in the middle, the player will be greatly discomforted. There's a problem. Such a problem can be solved by using the configuration described above.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the display mode which shows the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo special symbol, the pseudo special symbol is displayed in accordance with the timing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be displayed smoothly only by changing the swinging state (temporary stop state) to the completely stopped state (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating winning, since the lottery result of the first special symbol is winning, the player is surely granted a privilege It is possible to suppress the problem of giving distrust to the player with respect to the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, you may use structures other than the structure which displays a pseudo effect design during the period (during the period when "state 3" is set as an effect state) during the period which displays the pseudo effect design demonstrated in this embodiment as a main design. For example, you may make it perform the production which hesitates that a time-short state is complete | finished, without displaying any main symbols during the period. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the main symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol set with the fluctuation period longer than the remaining short period from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it can do, the situation which gives distrust to a player can be suppressed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16B, since the variation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped, the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“◯ ×”) indicating that it is off. In this way, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing (timing time end timing) of the special symbol 1, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is off. Even in this case, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

  In FIG. 16 (b), since the display mode indicating that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is two is displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, the second special symbol is displayed after the time-shortening state is ended. Will begin to fluctuate. In order to inform the player to that effect, “charge release time soon!” Is displayed above the first display area Dm. The “charge release time” indicates a period during which a jackpot corresponding to the number of second special symbols stored on hold is executed.

  When the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, “charge release time entry” is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. A normal symbol that is displayed in a variable manner at this timing (short-time end timing), that is, a normal symbol that starts to change during the short-time state and whose stop timing comes after the short-time end is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-described problems when the player shows a variable display of the main symbol Dmc.

  Next, when the charge release time is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special display 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the variation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the reserved memory number (the number of reserved symbols) of the special diagram 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one reserved A display mode indicating the number of memories is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the slave symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is displayed in the second display region Dn1 while being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17A, and in the second display region Dn2 The special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed, and in the second display area Dn3, the normal figure fluctuation is displayed as a subordinate pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 is changed, it is designed so that either the big win or the small win is easily won (100% win), and the period during which the special figure 2 is changed is , It is not necessary for the player to keep an eye on the fluctuation of the usual figure. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed as the main symbol, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of FIG. 2 is set to 2 seconds for both the normal state and the short time state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period that is normally set as the symbol variation time. Thereby, during the period when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, execution and stop of the usual figure fluctuation is suppressed without straddling a plurality of gaming states. Thereby, it is suppressed that an extra production | generation produces during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation. In addition, with this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time reduction state, the normal figure hit fluctuation is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time reduction), It is possible to suppress the increase in the special figure 2 hold during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time shortage) because the electric accessory 640a is released, and provide an excessive amount of balls to the player. This can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the normal symbol variation period and the special symbol variation period can be selected from a plurality of variations, and only when the selected variation period satisfies a predetermined condition, during the special symbol 2 variation period (short time) ) May be configured such that the electric accessory 640a can be opened. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpectedness and to make the game play motivated.

  Next, when the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 17B wins a small win and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18A is displayed. That is, the special display 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in the first display area Dm in the display mode ("555") indicating the small hit, and is released in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player about the location of the second variable winning device 650 is displayed. Then, “Aim at V” is displayed in the second sub display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds.

  When the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game shown in FIG. 18A, and the big hit game is started, FIG. ) Is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, or general) is displayed in the second display area Dm as a subordinate symbol. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to entertain the jackpot effect without worrying about the variable display of each symbol (special 1, special 2, general figure) being executed for the player.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot effect, “charge bonus first time” is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number of times of jackpot executed in the villa mode, and below that, the jackpot currently being executed is displayed. “ROUND1” is displayed as the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of round numbers (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the completion of the time-short state by the number of special figure 2 suspensions stored during the special-time figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during the time-shortening state.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured as described above, the display related to a plurality of jackpots executed during the extended game state is totaled as a single period from the start to the end of the extended game state. It is configured to be able to display the villa period cumulative display and a specific period cumulative display that counts only jackpot games based on the jackpot right acquired by one special figure 1 change (that is, special figure 2 hold number) In the example diagram shown in FIG. 18A, the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the number of rounds targeted for the big hit game within the specific period described above. A number display mode is displayed.

  In this round number display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot game are executed based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 acquired by one special figure 1 fluctuation, and the result of the determination Is displayed. Specifically, based on the completion of the special figure 1 change (150-second fluctuation) during the short-time game, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (that is, stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later). The winning information regarding the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of executable jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, a display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

  The round number display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 is an execution confirmed round number display mode (indicated by a solid circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the number of rounds that are determined to be executed. In-run round display mode (indicated by black circles in FIG. 18B) indicating the currently-running round, and the jackpot right acquired within a specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during short-time game) And a specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18B) that suggests the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed at.

  By executing the jackpot effect configured as described above, the player can play the special figure 2 reserved ball number displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the total round for a specific period displayed in the round number display area Dm6. While looking at the number suggestion display mode, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the execution confirmation round number display mode and the running round display mode are displayed in the round number display area Dm6, the round of the currently executed jackpot game is within the specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode), or the number of rounds that are determined to be executed (execution determined round number display mode), The player can easily grasp which area. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds executed within a specific period.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, “charge bonus first time” is displayed as the number of consecutive games executed in the consecutive resort mode, which indicates the number of jackpots executed. Display of the number of consecutive resorts is displayed as the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts within a specified period) executed based on the jackpot right acquired within the above-mentioned specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation during short-time game (150 seconds fluctuation)) You may make it display, and you may make it display both the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display of the number of consecutive resorts in a specific period. A means for calculating the special figure 1 fluctuation (the number of times 150 seconds fluctuation is executed during the short-time game) is provided, and the total jackpot number, the number of times of entering the specific period, and the number of times of entering the specific period are executed within one specific period. The number of jackpots to be played By configuring in this way, not only can the display mode during the jackpot game be enjoyed, but the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped and used for future games. After calculating the above-mentioned number of times, the average jackpot number within a specific period that is executed within one specific period may be displayed.

  By displaying the average number of jackpots within the specified period, if the average number of jackpots within the specified period is low, the normal symbol lottery result is biased out of place, or the normal symbol lottery is executed. It can be used as a reference for future games while analyzing the possible cause and whether the number of balls passing to the gate 67 is small.

  In this embodiment, the display mode (1 round, 1 display mode) corresponding to the round number is displayed as the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited thereto, and any display mode can be used as long as the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule corresponding to the number of rounds.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, “ROUND1” is displayed as the round number display indicating the number of rounds currently being executed, but this round number display also displays the number of rounds for one big hit game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added to the jackpot game executed within a specific period. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the consecutive resort mode. In the second sub display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, “5, 10, 20” indicating the number of times executed in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

  When the second jackpot game is started by the short-time fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18B ends, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. The display screen inside is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the state in which the second jackpot game is started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining number of reserved memories is “0”. In the main display area Dm, “charge bonus second time” is displayed as a number of consecutive resorts to indicate that the current jackpot is the second one in the consecutive resort mode. In the round number display area Dm6, a total number of execution confirmed rounds for 20 rounds is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18B, the round number displayed as the specific period total round number suggestion display mode is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode by executing the current jackpot game (second time). ing. Thus, by changing the specific period total round number suggestion display mode to the execution confirmed round number display mode, it is possible for the player to execute the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to notify the number of rounds of the current jackpot game, among the number of rounds displayed as the specific period total round number suggestion display mode, the current jackpot Although the configuration is such that the amount corresponding to the number of rounds of the game can be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the big hit game is started, the execution confirmed round number display If a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round) is established during the jackpot game, The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. Thereby, in order to grasp | ascertain the number of execution confirmation rounds also during a jackpot game, it can be made interested in production.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the specific period total round number suggestion display mode showed all the examples which change to the execution fixed round number display mode, the structure of other than that may be sufficient, for example, a specific period total round number suggestion display mode Only a part of the game may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display form, or the specific period total round number suggestion display form may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display form at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. It may be. Thereby, the jackpot game can be executed while always having a sense of expectation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B, the remaining period (the remaining fluctuation period in FIG. 1) in the short-time state (the short-time state in which the fluctuation in the special figure 1 is executed) is the predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) executed when the remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the extended game mode will end when there is no reserved memory in FIG. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining time in the short-time state is within 10 seconds and the number of special figure 2 suspension is “0”. Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during this battle production and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is generated, a battle victory production is performed to indicate that the extended game mode continues. (Refer to FIG. 20 (a)). If a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the extended mode is continued ( (Refer FIG.20 (b)). In addition, in this embodiment, when a battle effect is performed, the effect which finally loses to a battle is set. This is because the period of the battle effect is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal fluctuation can be changed three or four times, and the probability that the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is This is because it is lower than the probability that a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle performance. In other words, the processing load can be reduced because it is only necessary to execute control that varies the contents of the effect only when a low-probability event occurs.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it has comprised so that the effect result of a battle effect may differ with the presence or absence of special figure 2 hold | maintenance, you may include an element other than that. For example, when the lottery result of FIG. 1 that fluctuates in the short time is a big hit, the battle victory effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of FIG. Thereby, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player who is predicting the victory or defeat of the battle effect based only on the content (presence / absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 occurs, but as another configuration, for example, during the battle effect, Even if hold storage occurs, the display mode of the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the battle effect is being executed, and to increase the effect of the battle effect. Can do.

  In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate based on the winning information of a normal symbol stored on hold, and to change the content of the battle effect (the opponent, the order of attack, the type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result It is good to configure. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the effect of the battle effect. Furthermore, a privilege effect that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the battle effect may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (a), description will be given of the contents of effects executed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit, the main hold symbol display area Dm5 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is stored up to the upper limit (four pieces). The main reserved symbol is displayed in the display mode (display mode with four black circles in the figure). A message for congratulating that the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit is displayed at the center of the first display area Dm. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first display area Dm, a bonus effect (a lively effect using characters) unrelated to the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

  In the first sub display area Ds1, characters “??” that hide the remaining period of time are displayed. By comprising in this way, it can be made hard to make a player grasp | ascertain which game state is the period when the privilege production mentioned above is performed.

  Here, during special figure 1 short-time fluctuation, the lottery of the normal symbol is repeatedly performed, and the electrification 640a is opened by winning the normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Thus, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player pays the most attention to the normal symbol lottery result. Therefore, the main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIG. 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (four), the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored any more. The player will not watch whether or not the normal symbol is won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as a subordinate symbol.

  Thereby, it can suppress displaying the 3rd symbol corresponding to the symbol which a player does not watch as a main symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that occurs when the universal main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, description will be made on the contents of effects when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal game state is won. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the small hit game is started, and FIG. 22B shows a specific timing (second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen in (open timing).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. The pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable prize-winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the sub display area Ds describes “game content during the small hit game”. If the symbols (pseudo main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the characters “chance” are displayed (see FIG. 22A).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22B), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding the player to the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed, and a letter “Aim for V” for explaining the game content is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state. Displayed in one display area Dm. Thereby, it is possible to make it seem that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 that is executed a plurality of times during the small hit game is executed based on the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  Further, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main holding symbol for displaying the number of the holding symbols by emphasizing the player on the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed. It is composed. As a result, based on the fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol that is not related to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol), the retained symbol display indicating the number of reserved memories of each symbol is not changed. It can be made difficult for the player to notice. As another configuration, a pseudo hold symbol display (pseudo hold main symbol) that is changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also performs a variable display in which a stop display is performed in a stop display mode (for example, a dissemination) indicating a disengagement, unlike the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. Is done. Thereby, even if the interval of the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is the opening that the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is advantageous to the player. It is configured to vary depending on whether it is timing (opening timing at which a ball can pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3)), for example, stop of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing advantageous to the player As the display mode, for example, a display mode in which a specific identical number is stopped is set, such as “777”. As a result, it is possible to grasp the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the advantageous degree of the opening timing by the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hit game. It is possible to give interest to the contents of the effect display.

  Next, with reference to Fig.23 (a), the error display displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is performed in a normal state where a left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, when it is determined that a right-handed game has been performed in a normal state where a left-handed game is executed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. Thus, the notification display area Dm7 is formed, and the characters “Please return to left-handed” are displayed. Thereby, the game content can be corrected by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the error display in FIG. 23A detects that a right-handed game is executed (a ball has passed through the through gate 67) during a normal state in which the left-handed game is executed. However, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the short-time state to the normal state in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed as the gaming state. Even if it is detected that the error has occurred, the error display should not be executed. Specifically, just before the transition from the short-time state to the normal state (immediately before the end of the short-time state), the electric period that is executed when the fluctuation period of the normal symbol started and the fluctuation (lottery) result is a win A predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) may be set as a grace period during which the error display is not executed during the operation period of the accessory 640a or after the time reduction state ends.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the error display from being executed even if a ball launched into the game area immediately before the time reduction state ends and passes through the through gate 67 after the time reduction state ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of a player who has been actively playing a game until immediately before the end of the short-time state.

  In the case of using such a configuration, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-described grace period, an extraordinary special effect may be executed. It is preferable to execute a revival effect indicating that the state advantageous to the player (rensou mode) has been revitalized. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG.23 (b), the display content displayed during the open | release operation | movement of the electrically-driven accessory 640a in a time-short state is demonstrated. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during the operation of opening the electric utility article during the short time state (during the long opening). In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is continuously performed during the short-time state, so that the ball can be immediately entered into the second entrance 640 if the electric accessory 640a is long open. A game board 13 is configured. In addition, the electric accessory 640a that is opened for a long time is opened for 3 seconds as the first opening period, and then the closing period of 5 seconds is set, and then the opening period of 3 seconds (second opening period) is set again.

  The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a. It is what is done. That is, if a right-handed game is normally performed, the first board is used despite the configuration of the game board 13 that allows the ball to surely enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period. As a case where a ball has not entered the second entrance 640 during the opening period, it is considered that a normal right-handed game has not been executed, so a display for prompting a right-handed shot is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is set so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when the ball is fired in the right-handed game until the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (electrical accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds, The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the second entrance 640 by performing a right-handed game for 3 seconds after the closing period is started.

  In the present embodiment, the first opening period and the second opening period are set to the same number of seconds, the means for measuring the elapsed period of the first opening period, and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the second opening period For example, the second opening period may be set longer than the first opening period. Accordingly, when a right-handed game is performed based on the display for prompting a right-hand hit being displayed in the notification display area Dm7, the ball can be more reliably entered into the second entrance 640. it can.

  In the present embodiment, 5 seconds is set as the closing period, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number that can be entered into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, a single ball may be set as the end condition. As a result, even if the closing period (the closing period executed after the first opening period) that is executed during the opening operation of the electric utility item 640a is lengthened, Thus, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be ended before the closing period is executed.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and the variation pattern used. The variation type counter CS1 to be used and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first entrance 64 when both are shown). )) Is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to winning in the second entrance 640. Yes. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of 4 reserved balls, and a total of up to 8 reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if a ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is displayed as a special symbol. When a ball is won in the first reserved ball storage area 203a and the second winning slot 640 wins, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are performed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved items (the number of reserved memories) is set to 4 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the upper limit number of the reserved number corresponding to each symbol is However, the value may be set differently, or only one special symbol may be reserved.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed or when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted, When winning the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. And stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and 5 winning balls (in this embodiment) Only the prize ball is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. A random value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the random number value that is a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, the first per random number table 202a is provided with a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”, and if it is “1 to 299”, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table 202a as described above. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that is 300 is the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot is “1/300”. In addition, since the value of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a small hit in the first special symbol is 3, and the value of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299, the first The probability that the special symbol is a small hit is “1/100”, and the probability that the second special symbol is a small hit is “299/300”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has reached reach as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into those for the normal state and those for the short time state, and the range of the random value set for each outage stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol or in the short-time state.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables respectively corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. The table is set up. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Is detected and stored in the ordinary drawing execution area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 26C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in this second random number table 202c, there are twelve random number values that are normal symbols, and the range is “0 to 11”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, since the total number of random number values that can be hit is 12, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “12/240 (1/20) "

  In the present embodiment, the normal state and the short-time state can be set as the gaming state, and the second time when the normal symbol fluctuates or the normal symbol is hit according to the gaming state. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the entrance 640 is made different, and it is configured such that the ball enters the second entrance 640 more easily in the short-time state than in the normal state. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aiming at the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a) is performed, and when the gaming state is the short-time state. A game (right-handed game) that aims at the second entrance 640 can be performed.

  When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the normal state, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 4 seconds. The Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short-circuited) for “0.1 second × 2 times”. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the time-short state, the second symbol display device 83 executes the normal symbol variation display for 3 seconds, and the acquired value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired. Is determined to be a win if it is in the range of “0 to 11”, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) for “3 seconds × 2 times”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 are displayed. Is configured such that the electric accessory 640a is opened long only when the timing at which the operation is completed (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is short. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in the short-time state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Even if (the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened long. However, even when the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in the normal state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated (electric If the timing at which the operation of the accessory 640a is set) is short, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened long.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see 53).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 53), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

  Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 26A, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. Is prescribed.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is used for entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b) as shown in FIG. It is a table in which a random value (determination value) determined to be a winning is set in the first special symbol lottery based. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 299”, it is determined that the value is out of place.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26C, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second entrance 640. ) Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”, and if it is “1 to 299”, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26D) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0-11, Determined.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 2 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z). This electric accessory 640a works to guide the ball to enter the second entrance 640 by moving forward (opening operation) forward. On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the ball does not guide to the second entrance 640 (does not enter).

  As will be described in detail later, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened again for 3 seconds after a 3 second opening period (first opening period) after a 3 second opening period (first opening period). An opening operation (long opening) in which a period (second opening period) is set is executed, and when not in the short-time state (in the normal state), after the elapse of the opening period (first opening period) of 0.1 seconds, After a 0.1 second closing period, an opening operation (short opening) is performed in which a 0.1 second opening period (second opening period) is set again. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is intended to enter the second entrance 640 in spite of not being in a short time state (in a normal state).

  In addition, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is designed so that when one ball enters the second entrance 640, an end condition for the opening operation is satisfied and the opening operation is ended. Thereby, it can suppress that a several ball | bowl enters into the 2nd entrance 640 by opening operation | movement of the electrically-driven accessory 640a once. Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the ball that flows down the flow path capable of entering the second entrance 640 is regulated, Since a plurality of balls can be prevented from entering the second entrance 640 at a time, the plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 by opening the electric accessory 640a once. It is possible to further suppress the ball.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b wins the big win of the first special symbol, or wins the big bonus of the first special symbol, and the ball is in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (FIG. 5))), when winning the jackpot of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 and the second special symbol for selecting the jackpot type when passing, or winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, And a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting a jackpot type when the ball passes a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the jackpot game (FIG. 27 ( a)).

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the first special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, the jackpot A (7R time short hit jackpot) is selected, and “580” In the case of “˜99”, the jackpot D (short hitless hit at 16R) is selected. When the first special symbol is a small hit, a big hit type is selected corresponding to a small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is a small hit A, a big hit C (7R time short hit big hit) is selected, and when the small hit B is a big hit D (2R short short hit big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27C, when the second special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), the big hit E (15R short-time big hit) ) Is selected. When the second special symbol is a small hit, a big hit type is selected corresponding to a small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R short-time big hit) is selected, and when the small hit D, the big hit G (10R short-time big hit) is selected. Is a jackpot E (short hit jackpot at 15R).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of each jackpot type described above, when “short-time jackpot” is selected, a short-time state of “short-time number of times” is given after the jackpot game ends. However, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and two or more times may be set, or a different number of time reduction states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do it. In addition, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the gaming state set at the time of winning the winning jackpot type and the big winning (the ball has passed the specific area), A different number of time-short states may be selected based on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot based on the number of times that the “big jackpot” is continuously selected. By configuring in this way, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), it is possible to vary the privilege contents (number of times in a short time state) given after the jackpot game ends, and the game during the jackpot game It is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while expecting what kind of privilege (short time state) will be given after the jackpot game ends.

  Also, in this embodiment, a time-short end condition is set to end the time-short state by executing a special symbol change for a preset number of time-short times, but a time-short end condition different from this embodiment For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the variation of each special symbol. Specifically, as the short-time end condition, the first special symbol change count is 4 times, or the second special symbol change count is 1 time. The total number of fluctuations with the 2 special symbol may be set to 4 times, or the fact that the number of fluctuations with the second special symbol is 1 may be set as the short-time end condition.

  In addition, each time a special symbol change is performed, a lottery for determining whether or not to end the time-saving state may be executed, and the time-shortening state may be ended based on the lottery result. The time-short state may be terminated when the display is stopped with the symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a complicated timing for the completion of the short-time state, and to allow the player who is in the short-time game to play a game while expecting the short-time state to continue for a long time. Can do. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the period in which the time reduction does not end be notified to the player. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to grasp a part of the period in which the time reduction does not end and to allow the player to play the game with confidence during the period.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small bonus type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small bonus type when winning the small bonus of the first special symbol, and a small bonus hit of the second special symbol There is a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting the small hit type (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the small bonus winning of the first special symbol is selected, if the value of the small bonus type counter C5 is “0 to 10”, the small bonus A (V passable) is selected. In the case of “11 to 99”, the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), at the time of winning the small hit of the second special symbol, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0-9", the small hit C (V passable) is selected, In the case of “10 to 24”, the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of “25 to 99”, the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operated, and a ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. Yes. On the other hand, in the small hit game with the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. A ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E are small hits that allow the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and can receive a big hit game, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit. .

  In addition, in the small hit game with the small hit A and B (the small hit type selected by the small special winning selection of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the open / close door 650f is opened for a short period of time (FIG. 10). In the small hit game based on the small hits C to E (the small hit type selected by winning the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the open / close door 650f is opened for a long period of time (see FIG. 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits that make it difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit that the ball is easy to enter.

  In this control example, the type of jackpot to be given afterwards is determined according to the type of jackpot, the jackpot given after the jackpot A is jackpot C (7R short-time jackpot), The jackpot granted later is jackpot D (short-term jackpot at 2R), the jackpot awarded after jackpot C is jackpot F (short-term jackpot at 5R), and the jackpot awarded after jackpot D is jackpot G (10R The jackpot granted after the small hit E is a jackpot E (15R short hit jackpot).

  In this control example, the type of jackpot to be given afterwards is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, when the ball passes the V winning switch 650e3, the jackpot that has won the right is executed. May be. By doing in this way, the player can select a small hit to pass the V winning switch 650e3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, it may be configured to execute a predetermined lottery based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and to determine the jackpot type based on the lottery result. Good. As a result, the contents of the jackpot game executed depending on the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area can be made different, so that the player will be willing to play the jackpot game and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode (variation time), and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to special symbol types, lottery results, and gaming states are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 extraordinary fluctuation pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d3. In addition, at least a special figure 1 short-time fluctuation pattern table 202d4 and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table 202d5 are defined.

  First, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. This special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects a variation pattern (variation time) in the case of winning the jackpot out of the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. And a random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern is defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “51 to 179”. The variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and the variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29C, the contents of the special pattern deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described. This special figure 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is used when the lottery result of special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is defined.

  Specifically, when complete outage is determined as the stop type, a fluctuation pattern of short out (7 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “99 to The fluctuation pattern of extraordinary (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “198”. In addition, when the first special symbol is drawn and the outage reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 149” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , “150 to 197” is associated with various types of super reach (60 seconds), and “198” is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (d). The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is a first special symbol (in normal state) ( Among the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) of special figure 1), a random value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a small hit. ) Is prescribed.

  Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, various types of super reach (60 seconds) are available regardless of the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, various variation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is set so as to be easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. So, if a player continues to display changes for a long time, isn't he winning a big hit? I will play a game while expecting. Therefore, a game result can be predicted by the period length of the set variation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30 (a), the contents of the special figure 1 shortening variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. This special figure 1 short-time fluctuation pattern table 202d42 has a random value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the short-time state. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, a variation pattern for 150 seconds is associated with the value regardless of the determined stop type and variation type counter CS1.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202d5. In the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern table 202d5, random values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the short time state are defined.

  Specifically, when the determined stop type is a big hit, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a short jackpot (7 seconds) is set, and when the determined stop type is a small hit, the change type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a short / small hit (2 seconds) is associated.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 counter ball number counter 203e, normal symbol counter ball number counter 203f, hour and middle counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit middle flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit middle flag 203k, V passing big hit type storage area 203m , A V flag 203n, a storage cancellation flag 203p, a cancellation counter 203qa, a short / medium time hit flag 203q, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter C5 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holdings. Among the vacant areas of the areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order from the smallest. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning at the second entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero. Each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is reached. One is added (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). Similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1103: No in FIG. 47). ).

  The short / medium time counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining short time period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the short time state (short time state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203g is set to 1 at the end of the big hit game whose jackpot type is other than “big hit B, D” (that is, “big hit A, C, E to G”) (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the big hit game, the time saving state is given once.

  The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54). Is determined (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set off when it is determined in the jackpot control process that the jackpot start timing is reached (see S1802 in FIG. 54). Thereby, the process according to jackpot start timing can be performed. In each of the control examples described above, although not shown, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Like the jackpot start flag 203h described above, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38). In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that the timing of the jackpot end is reached. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

  The small hitting start flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a small hitting start timing. The small hitting start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hitting in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). In the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), it is referred to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. Is determined to be off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

  The small hitting flag 203k is a flag used for determining whether or not a small hitting game is being executed, that is, whether or not a small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting flag 203k is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42) in the same manner as the small hitting start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not the small hit is being made (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. Is set to OFF (S1911 in FIG. 55).

  The V passing jackpot type storage area 203m is an area for storing the jackpot type corresponding to the winning jackpot type when winning the jackpot, and the ball is in a specific area during the jackpot gaming state. The type of jackpot to be executed based on having passed is stored. In the V pass big hit type storage area 203m, in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), the big hit type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V pass process (see FIG. 50). ), The set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

  The V flag 203n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and the jackpot type is set based on the value of the V flag 203n at the end of the small hit game. Is. The V flag 203n is set based on the value of the big hit type at the time of passing V in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referenced in the small hitting end process (S2003, S2004 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, it is set to OFF (S2006 in FIG. 56).

  The storage cancellation flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened), and when the storage device 750 is set to ON, When the state is released and set to OFF, the storage device 750 enters the storage state. This storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined that the big hit start timing is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) (S1801: YES in FIG. 54), and the storage device Reference is made in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58), it is set to off (FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is released at the timing when the big hit game is started (the storage valve 750a is opened), and the storage state is reached when a predetermined period (10 seconds) elapses (the storage valve). 750a is closed). Thereby, the privilege given to a player when winning a jackpot can be increased.

  In addition, as a structure which changes the state (storage state, cancellation | release state) of the storage apparatus 750, you may use structures other than this embodiment, for example, the jackpot which transfers the storage apparatus 750 to a cancellation | release state, and the storage apparatus 750 The jackpot that does not shift to the release state may be set according to the selected jackpot type, and a plurality of winning ports (for example, the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650) are determined in advance. In the case where a jackpot game that is released in a predetermined order is executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to a release state at a timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

  Furthermore, also about the structure (termination condition of a cancellation | release state) which transfers the storage apparatus 750 from a cancellation | release state to a storage state, in this embodiment, the structure which complete | finishes a cancellation | release state when 10 second passes after shifting to a cancellation | release state Even if the sphere is not stored in the storage device 750, the sphere can pass through the storage device 750, but the period during which the storage device is released is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the storage device 750 Only the stored sphere may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the storage device 750 stores the ball before the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is established.

  The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). This release counter 203pa is set to “1” (see FIG. 58) when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, the value is incremented by 1 each time the storage device control process is executed (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter has reached “25000” (see 2205 in FIG. 58). Based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to “0” (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

  The short time medium hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state a lottery of a normal symbol (ordinary drawing lottery) whose lottery result is a win is executed, and when the lottery is executed during the short time state, Set to on. The short / medium winning flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a to be executed based on the winning of the common drawing lottery.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large opening port solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning port 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a solenoid for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and turning off in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, and other lamps 227c, etc.), fluctuations It controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effects (variable display). The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of the effect images (the third symbol image, the reserved symbol image, the background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the established state of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols, one of the six types of performance states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b is in the established state (set to ON or OFF) of the consecutive-village flag 223i, the normal map valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 variation flag 223s. The production state is selected from among the production states “1” to “6”.

  Specifically, in the state where the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to OFF, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state “1” is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the consecutive-village flag 223i is set on and the normal-use effective flag 223q is set on, the effect state “5” is selected. In a state in which the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (common figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). When the usual fluctuation stop timing is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the production state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the presentation state selected by the presentation state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222 b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that not only the above-described third symbol and hold symbol, but also the various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set as the targets whose display mode is changed according to the set effect state. However, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 are different. It is stipulated in. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having complex game characteristics, the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol are made different depending on the production state. The main game result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner simply by allowing the player to grasp the symbol and the main hold symbol.

  Specifically, when the production state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the hold for indicating the reserved memory number of the special symbol 1 The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The production state “1” is selected when the game state is a normal state in which a left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the production state “2” is selected, the pseudo-design for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any reserved symbols (see FIG. 22B). The production state “2” is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of FIG. 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is the same as the other main symbols, the symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and the stop display (FIG. 22). (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing at which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of FIG. The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)). The opening timing of the second specified prize opening 650a during the winning game can be notified, and a privilege that the second specified prize opening 650a is opened as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is given. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific prize opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific prize opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called disparity)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the production state “2” is selected, since the main reserved symbol is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. In other words, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2, Universal Diagram) that is actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, universal figure reserved symbol) will not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the production state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any one of the reserved symbols (Special Fig. 1 reserved symbol, Special Fig. 2 reserved symbol, Ordinary diagram reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. When the main symbol starts to change, the main reserved symbol is not reduced, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the production state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the production state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the pseudo main symbol. You may make it display the pseudo main reservation symbol corresponding to Dmb. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number of pseudo main hold symbols to be displayed and the display mode based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game with the production state “2” selected is started. It is possible to execute a small hit game while having fun.

  Moreover, although the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing at which the second specific winning port 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, in addition, the second specific winning port 650a enters the second specific winning port 650a. Display control is performed so that the types of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege given by the sphere. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a is released at a timing at which the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a can pass through the specific region (V winning switch 650e3). The display mode (for example, “777”) in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific prize opening 650a opened at other timings. The display mode (for example, “444”) is different from the specific same number as the stop display mode. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby informing the player of the opening timing to the second specific prize opening 650a, and further, depending on the type of the number displayed and stopped, The contents can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  Next, when the production state “3” is selected, the pseudo-design for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The production state “3” is selected when the game state is a short time state and a small hit game is executed.

  Next, when the production state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is reserved corresponding to special figure 2 The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The production state “4” is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation shown in FIG. 2 is executed.

  Next, when the production state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the usual figure becomes the main symbol (ordinary figure main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is designated as the main reserved symbol. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The production state “5” is selected when the game state is the short-time state, and the normal variation that allows the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a to be executed during the short-time state.

  When the production state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 becomes the main symbol (the special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The production state “6” is selected when the game state is a short-time state and the normal variation starts in a state where the remaining variation period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of the effect images (the third symbol image, the reserved symbol image, the background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the established state of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols, one of the six types of performance states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b is in the state where the consecutive-village flag 223i, the normal map valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s are established (turned on) Depending on whether it is set to off, one of the production states “1” to “6” is selected.

  Specifically, in the state where the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to OFF, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state “1” is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the consecutive-village flag 223i is set on and the normal-use effective flag 223q is set on, the effect state “5” is selected. In a state in which the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (common figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). When the usual fluctuation stop timing is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the production state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the presentation state selected by the presentation state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222 b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that not only the above-described third symbol and hold symbol, but also the various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set as the targets whose display mode is changed according to the set effect state. However, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having complex game characteristics, the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol are made different depending on the production state. The main game result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner simply by allowing the player to grasp the symbol and the main hold symbol.

  Specifically, when the production state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the hold for indicating the reserved memory number of the special symbol 1 The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The production state “1” is selected when the game state is a normal state in which a left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the production state “2” is selected, the pseudo-design for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any reserved symbols (see FIG. 22B). The production state “2” is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of FIG. 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is the same as the other main symbols, the symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and the stop display (FIG. 22). (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing at which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of FIG. The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)). The opening timing of the second specified prize opening 650a during the winning game can be notified, and a privilege that the second specified prize opening 650a is opened as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is given. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific prize opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific prize opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called disparity)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the production state “2” is selected, since the main reserved symbol is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. In other words, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2, Universal Diagram) that is actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, universal figure reserved symbol) will not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the production state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any one of the reserved symbols (Special Fig. 1 reserved symbol, Special Fig. 2 reserved symbol, Ordinary diagram reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. When the main symbol starts to change, the main reserved symbol is not reduced, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the production state “2” is selected, the main hold diagram is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the production state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the pseudo main symbol. You may make it display the pseudo main reservation symbol corresponding to Dmb. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number of pseudo main hold symbols to be displayed and the display mode based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game with the production state “2” selected is started. It is possible to execute a small hit game while having fun.

  Moreover, although the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing at which the second specific winning port 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, in addition, the second specific winning port 650a enters the second specific winning port 650a. Display control is performed so that the types of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege given by the sphere. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a is released at a timing at which the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a can pass through the specific region (V winning switch 650e3). The display mode (for example, “777”) in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific prize opening 650a opened at other timings. The display mode (for example, “444”) is different from the specific same number as the stop display mode. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby informing the player of the opening timing to the second specific prize opening 650a, and further, depending on the type of the number displayed and stopped, The contents can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  Next, when the production state “3” is selected, the pseudo-design for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The production state “3” is selected when the game state is a short time state and a small hit game is executed.

  Next, when the production state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is reserved corresponding to special figure 2 The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The production state “4” is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation shown in FIG. 2 is executed.

  Next, when the production state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the usual figure becomes the main symbol (ordinary figure main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is designated as the main reserved symbol. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The production state “5” is selected when the game state is the short-time state, and the normal variation that allows the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a to be executed during the short-time state.

  When the production state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 becomes the main symbol (the special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The production state “6” is selected when the game state is a short-time state and the normal variation starts in a state where the remaining variation period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a special symbol winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, An effect counter 223f, an hour / mid-time flag 223g, an hour / hour remaining period storage area 223h, a consecutive-village flag 223i, a variable time counter 223j, a state storage area 223k, an effect state storage area 223m, and a special 2 reserved flag 223n , Special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p, common figure valid flag 223q, pseudo production flag 223r, special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, universal figure winning information storage area 223t, universal figure fluctuation start flag 223u, replacement Flag 223v, privilege effect execution flag 223w, end effect execution flag 223x, Other memory area 223z and is provided with at least.

  The special symbol winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). Each of these areas includes a special symbol (first special symbol and first special symbol). The second special symbol) winning information is stored. Based on the information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuating effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are controlled by the main control. It is a counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effects held in the device 110. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the variable number of reserved balls based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is the second special symbol (special symbol). This corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery in 2).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, the variable display is suspended by entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b) and the second entrance 640. After the addition or subtraction, when the number of balls is added, or when the variable display in the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed in the main controller 110 and the reserved ball number is subtracted The reserved symbol number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). In this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, In order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be made. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  In the present embodiment, the normal symbol is also configured so that the variable display (right of symbol lottery) can be held (upper limit of 4) in the same manner as the special symbol described above. When a command set when the value of the counter 203f increases or decreases is received, a normal symbol holding ball counter (not shown) is provided as a counter for increasing or decreasing the value in accordance with the content of the received command. However, the processing executed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114 differ only in the target command for the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is used, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of a normal symbol reservation ball number counter on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, it is the same as the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol mentioned above is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each holding ball number command for display, it is received in a predetermined area (secondary holding symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)). Is displayed to indicate the number of held balls corresponding to the received command, and the number of held balls command to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area is selected based on the received display effect state command and held as the main held symbol. A display for indicating the number of balls is made. With this configuration, a display synchronized with the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main controller 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current performance state. The number of reserved balls on the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 sets all the numbers of reserved balls for each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) to a predetermined region (subordination symbol display regions Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 ( a) see)), and a part thereof can be displayed as a main reserved symbol. However, the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this. For example, each symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed. , Special figure 2, ordinary figure), when the received number-of-holding ball number command is received, based on the received display effect state command, the reserved symbol (main reserved symbol) to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area, The reserved symbols (secondary reserved symbols) to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area are discriminated, and based on the discrimination results, the third symbol display device 81 holds the symbols corresponding to the symbols (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2, Universal Diagram). You may make it display a symbol.

  The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command (for special figure) transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a special figure display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

  The special figure display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the special pattern display variation pattern command and displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the special pattern display variation pattern command. As shown, the display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the present embodiment, as the special pattern display variation pattern command, the special diagram 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol variation and the special diagram 2 display variation corresponding to the second special symbol variation. The pattern command can be set. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received variation pattern command for special figure display (variation pattern command for special figure 1 display, variation pattern command for special figure 2 display). It is configured to do.

  In the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays a predetermined area (the symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)). A display for indicating a symbol sequence (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is made, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. Is selected from each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, universal symbol), and the selected symbol is displayed as a main symbol. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current performance state. It is possible to inform the player of the change of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variation display (symbol sequence) of each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) in a predetermined region (second symbol display of the second display region Dn). Displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9A)), and a part thereof can be displayed in the first display area as the main symbols. The display method of the figure is not limited to this. For example, when the display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2, General Figure) is received, the received display is displayed. The symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and the symbol (subordinate symbol) to be displayed in the secondary symbol display area are discriminated based on the production effect command, and the third symbol display is based on the discrimination result. Fluctuation display corresponding to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) on the device 81 (symbol column) It may be displayed.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of jackpot) (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. . The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining the effect pattern with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. Thereby, when setting one production | presentation pattern, since the same counter value is no longer used in multiple places, the bias of the production | presentation pattern set can be suppressed. In addition, you may comprise so that an effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing a different process with respect to the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the first digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tenth digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to one of the acquired values. You may make it refer to the 1st place of the obtained value by multiplying the value which made the place of 3 times and the value which made the place of the tens place 5 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The short time flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the current time is short. At this time, if the short / medium flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state, and if it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a short time state. The short / middle flag 223g is set to ON (3906 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the state will shift to the short time state after the jackpot is ended, and the variable display setting process (in FIG. 66). In S3113 of FIG. 66), it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes in FIG. 66), and when it is determined that the hour / middle flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes in FIG. 66). ) Is set to OFF (S3705 in FIG. 66).

  In the present embodiment, since the special symbol change (lottery) is executed once (that is, the number of time reductions is once) as the termination condition of the time reduction state, the time reduction / medium flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the change of the special symbol is started in the state set to, the hour / medium flag 223g is set to OFF, but the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the gaming state is the hour / short state. For example, if the number of time reductions is set to 100, a time reduction counter that can determine the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time a special symbol is changed (lottery) The counter value may be updated, and when the counter value is updated to a value indicating that the time-shortening state ends, the time-shortage flag 223g may be set to OFF. Thereby, even if it is the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of time reductions is set to a plurality of times (two or more times), it is determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the termination condition of the short-time state is satisfied when the variation of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time). Other configurations may be used. For example, the first special symbol may be separately measured and the second special symbol variation t may be separately measured. May be changed 10 times (lottery), or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time-saving state may be ended when one of the end conditions is satisfied. Alternatively, the short-time state may be terminated under conditions other than the number of special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) or the normal symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, an end condition for ending the short-time state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be used in which an end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied when various driving members provided (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) are driven, The above-described drive counts of the various drive members may be measured, and when the drive count reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), an end condition for ending the time reduction state may be satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time-short state ends, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The short time remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the short time state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the time-shortening state ends when the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) changes once during the time-shortening state. That is, the variation time of the special symbol set during the time reduction state is the remaining period during the time reduction state.

  The consecutive-village flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a right-handed gaming state (continuous-village state). It indicates that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the current gaming state is a normal state. This consecutive-village flag 223i is set to ON (see S3903 in FIG. 68) when it is determined that the big hit is started in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), and the effect is based on the effect state selection table 222b. Referenced when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the state does not enter the time-saving state after the jackpot is ended, or when the time-conditional end condition is satisfied in the state where there is no reserved memory in FIG. (See S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has shifted from the short-time state in the state having the reserved memory of FIG. 2 in addition to the big hit state and the short-time state as a gaming state (right-handed gaming state) advantageous to the player. The number of reserved balls output from the main controller 110 indicates whether or not the game state includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether or not the current state is a game state advantageous to the player (right-handed game state). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on the command, various status commands, and the like. As a result, there is no need to execute processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is the advantageous state on the main control device 110 side, and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Note that the main controller 110 may perform processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (right-handed gaming state) is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the right-handed gaming state is in progress is externally indicated. It is good to comprise so that the signal (right-handed signal) for alerting | reporting may be output. In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the jackpot state or the short-time state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined condition is satisfied, If the player is determined to shift to the jackpot state, the player is continuously informed of the right-handed gaming state, thereby allowing the player to continuously execute the right-handed game. It is possible to suppress annoying games.

  The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the special figure 1 fluctuation time in the short-time state, and the remaining time in the short-time state is calculated based on the value of the measured counter. If the fluctuation time counter 223j determines that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has started during the time reduction (during the time reduction state) in the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) (S4103: Yes in FIG. 70), The counter value is set to “1”, and thereafter, every time the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, “1” is added until the counter value becomes “150,000” (S4108 in FIG. 70). When the counter value becomes “150,000” (S4107: Yes in FIG. 70), the counter value is set to “0” (S4109). Then, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j, the short time remaining period (remaining time in the short time state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

  The state storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the state when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received. In the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61), When a status command is received (S3215: Yes in FIG. 61), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). Based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, a display state command is set, and various images (background images and demo images) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main controller 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

  The effect state storage area 223m is displayed in the display control device 114 in the display mode of each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, universal diagram) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and each reserved symbol (special diagram 1 reserve). This is an area for storing the effect state used for setting the display effect state command to be referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, and universal figure reserved symbol). This effect state includes the setting status of various flags set in the various processes of the audio lamp control device 113 (the consecutive-village flag 223i, the normal map valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s) Based on the symbol variation stop timing, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223m. The effect state storage area 223m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state for the past several times. Thereby, it is possible to compare and determine the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transition pattern that cannot be transferred when a normal game is being played, and to determine the presence or absence of an illegal game.

  In addition, when the production state transitions in a predetermined transition pattern over a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the production state 4 to the production state 5 is repeated five or more times without going through the production states 1 and 2). It is possible to provide an effect state (for example, a Dalianso effect state) that is selected only for the item, and to enhance the effect. In addition, when the Dalian Zhuang production state is set, it is better not to display the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and to display a privilege video that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm. .

  The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 (special 2) is stored in the short-time state, and the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON so that the special 2 hold flag 223n is turned on. 2 indicates that there is a holding memory (holding symbol), and setting it to OFF indicates that there is no holding memory (holding symbol) in FIG. This special 2 holding flag 223n is set to ON when the special 2 holding ball number is updated to 1 in the holding ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). The special 2 holding flag 223n is referred to when the time-short state is determined to have ended in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the special 2 holding ball count becomes zero. Set to off.

  The special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the hold storage of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (four) during the time-shortening state. By being set to ON, it indicates that the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time-shortening state, and the special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to OFF, This indicates that the number of reserved storage in special figure 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (four).

  This special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to the upper limit in the reserved ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (S3406: Yes in FIG. 63) ( Reference is made in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and it is set to OFF when the special 2 reserved ball number is no longer the upper limit.

  The normal figure valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a normal figure fluctuation (ordinary symbol fluctuation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning the winning can be an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player, When the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, it indicates that the electric charge 640a is a fluctuation of the normal figure at a timing at which it can be opened for a long time, and when it is set to OFF, the electric charge 640a is short-circuited. It shows that there is a change in the usual figure at the timing of opening.

  The normal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the normal figure fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that both the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing are in the short-time state (FIG. 67). S3806 of FIG. 67), it is set to OFF when it is determined that the variation start timing is not in the short-time state, or when it is determined that the variation end timing is not in the short-time state (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting state of the normal-use effective flag 223q is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and is set to ON so that the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state. Is executed. When the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, an effect display with the pseudo symbol as the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hit game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (see S3915 in FIG. 68) when the small win in FIG. 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68). Is set to OFF when the process ends (S3917 in FIG. 68). The setting state of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has started, and is set to ON so that the second special symbol (special figure 2) It indicates that the change has started. This special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern related process (see S3202 in FIG. 62) when the received fluctuation pattern command is the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern command (S3302 in FIG. 62). When the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to OFF. The setting state of the special 2 variation flag 223s is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  Here, in this embodiment, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the fluctuation result (lottery result). ) Is given a big hit or a small win, and the small hit game executed based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is a ball in a specific region (V It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes the winning switch 650e3). That is, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured as described above, the second special symbol is displayed while the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is varied). It is variably displayed as the main symbol (Special Fig. 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a fluctuating display of the second special symbol to which a state advantageous to the player is given is missed.

  The regular winning information storage area 223t is an area for storing winning information included in the winning information command when a normal symbol winning information command is received. The detailed configuration is the same as that of the special figure winning information storage area 223a described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol variation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol has been executed, and indicates that the normal symbol is varied by being set to ON. This variation start flag 223u is determined in the variation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) that the received variation pattern command is not a special variation pattern command (is a variation pattern command for ordinary use). Is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62), and when it is determined that it is set to ON in the common map display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

  The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the short-time state (end timing of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in which the fluctuation has started in the short-time state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy a predetermined condition. In addition, by setting it to ON, it is indicated that the end timing of the usual figure variation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the short-time state. When the replacement flag 223v is set to ON, the production state “6” is selected as the production state.

  The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the privilege effect is being executed. While this privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot be normally viewed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This special effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and displays a special effect command for display. Is set to ON (see S4005 in FIG. 69), and in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to OFF (see FIG. 69). 68 (see S3907 in FIG. 68), and is set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). That is, when the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set on even once in the state where the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to on (in the consecutive resort mode) (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes the upper limit). When it reaches), the bonus effect is continuously executed for the period until the extended villa mode ends.

  By comprising in this way, even if it will be in the state where a privilege production | presentation is performed, it can prevent the situation where a privilege production | presentation will be complete | finished immediately. That is, after the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, at least all of the reserved balls in the special figure 2 are digested, and then the special effect is produced until the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the short-time state is completed. Since it is comprised so that can be performed, a privilege effect can be displayed continuously.

  Moreover, since it can be made to display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 over a long period of time by having comprised in this way that the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 reached the upper limit, with respect to the surrounding player You can appeal and get satisfaction. Furthermore, in order to obtain the satisfaction, the game can be performed eagerly.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprises so that a specific privilege effect may be performed on condition that the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 reached the upper limit even once, it is not restricted to this, For example, consecutive resort mode A means for measuring the number of times that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit may be provided, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game more eagerly.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the privilege production | presentation execution flag 223w is set to ON, although it has set so that privilege production may be performed until the extended resort mode is complete | finished, it is not restricted to this, You may set the period until all the reservation ball numbers of special figure 2 are digested as a period when privilege production is performed. Thereby, in the extended villa mode, the production can be switched every time the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed during the short-time state, and the game is eager to continue the continuous villa mode with a new feeling. Can do.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for executing the bonus effect is satisfied, the bonus effect is automatically executed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, pachinko. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) provided in the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. Thereby, the desired effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as a condition for executing the bonus effect, but other conditions may be set as conditions for executing the bonus effect. For example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, it may be set on the condition that the special figure 1 that is changing is won (big hit, small hit). Thus, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is fluctuating is a big hit, it is substantially five times (one big hit based on the special figure 1 once, Since the jackpot game of 4 jackpots based on FIG. 2 is provided, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player. By allowing the bonus presentation to be executed only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the bonus presentation can be enhanced, and the game can be performed eagerly to see the bonus presentation.

  In this case, whether or not the bonus effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes three (a sub-maximum number less than the upper limit number). It is good to perform display (privilege effect execution suggestion display) that informs (suggests) the player. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while expecting the lottery result of FIG. 1 and the provision of the bonus effect. In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number becomes the upper limit number (4), the special effect is configured to be executed, and the content of the special effect is changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed, It is made to change based on the remaining time in the short-time state (the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 being changed) at the time when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution condition of the bonus effect is established). May be. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly.

  The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that an end effect (see FIGS. 19B to 20B) for indicating that the extended-village mode is to be ended, and is turned on. By setting to, it indicates that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the special shortage flag 223n is set to OFF in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) and the remaining time is 10 seconds. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referred to when the special 2 hold flag 223n is turned on in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, in a state where the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON and the second hold flag 223n is set to ON, it is assumed that the current time saving state is ended (the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is ended). However, the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is started, and the consecutive resort mode is continued. Therefore, the display victory command is set for the executed end effect, and the effect suggesting the revival from the end effect is executed. This allows the player to expect the continuation mode to continue even after the end effect has been executed, and allows the player to play the game eagerly to the end.

  Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to off after being set to off (see S3909 in FIG. 68). Note that the end effect executed in the present embodiment may be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the extended resort mode is always continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the apparent consecutive resort mode continuation probability in the end effect. Further, when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, a corresponding effect may be executed.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. A command storage area is provided.

  This command storage area is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance) 64b), or when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected, the power-on variation image using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on variation image on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the first ball slot 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on and the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the player is informed of the end of the special game state (big win state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 35).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 73) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 82B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) is executed to transfer image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 73 (b) In step S5303), pointer update processing (see step S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 36), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 36, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 73 (b) The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (see) is executed (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73B) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the sound lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The present embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each presentation state information, and is configured such that different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. .

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is maximized. When the value (in this embodiment, 299, 99, 99, 239, 99) is reached, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the left first entrance 64a, the right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b are shown, Or start winning processing associated with winning (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the through gate passing process is executed, the V entrance passing process associated with entering the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with winning the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display and the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIGS. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per-random number counter C1, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is determined, and the special symbol jackpot or jackpot In this case, either the big hits A to G or the small hits A to E are determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning opening opening scenario is set (S217), and then a jackpot start is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot medium flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the hour / counter counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S222: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Subsequently, the process of S221 is performed and this process is complete | finished. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the hourly / intermediate counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot”, “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol miss” This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S301). When the time is not short (S301: No), the normal variation start process (S302) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when the time is short (S301: Yes), the time variation start processing (S303) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the normal variation start process (S302) and the short time variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213) described above will be described.

  First, the normal variation start process (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal variation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39).

  In the normal variation start process, first, data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Thereafter, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, if the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, refer to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)) to win a big or small hit If it is determined that the lottery of the second special symbol is based on the entrance to the second entrance 640, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26C) is referred to to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit I do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S403). When the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the display mode for the normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and 7 It is determined what type of jackpot type out of the jackpots of special symbols (jackpots A to G) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to G). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to G) is set as the stop type.

  Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S405, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d5 (common and time reduction common) To determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

  In the process of S406, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S407 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), a display mode for the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Thereafter, a normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the special hit pattern variation pattern table 202d3 for special figure 1 or the big fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 (Normal / short time common) is compared to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  When the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode at the time of normal losing corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d2 for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for big hit for special figure 2 ( The change time of the symbol change is determined by comparing with (common / common for short time) (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the short time variation start process (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the short time variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213, see FIG. 39). This short time variation start process (S303) is different from the above-described normal variation start process (S302) in that the display mode for short time and the variation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. Detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processes of S505, S510, and S512, when the variation pattern for the time reduction of the first special symbol is determined, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for the special symbol 1 as described above (FIG. 30 (a)). )reference). On the other hand, when the variation pattern for the time reduction of the second special symbol is determined, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d5 for the special illustration 2 (common to both normal and time reduction) as in the normal variation start process (S302) (see FIG. 30 (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the small hitting start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the small hit type (small hits A to E). This is a process for setting the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the staying solenoid 209b, and the flow passage solenoid 209c in the small hit game.

  In the small hitting start setting process (S222), first, the small hitting type selected in the process of S409 of the normal variation starting process or the processing of S509 of the short time variation starting process is read (S601), and then the small hitting type A Or it is determined whether it is B (S602). When the small hit type is A or B (S602: Yes), an open scenario for the special figure 1 is set (S603). Note that the opening scenario for the special figure 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 10).

  When the process of S603 ends, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is B (S604). When the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is impossible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere cannot flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S604, when the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so as to enable V winning (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, when the small hit type is not A or B (that is, the small hit type is C, D or E) (S602: No), an open scenario for special figure 2 is set (S606). ). The opening scenario for the special figure 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the process of S607 ends, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning can be made (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

  When the processes in S605 and S607 are completed, the V passing big hit type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V passing big hit type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 acquired in the process of S601, the V pass big hit type (big hit C to G) is determined. As described above, if the jackpot type is A, it is determined that the jackpot C (7 rounds short hit big hit), and if the jackpot type is B, the jackpot D (two rounds short hit big hit) If the small hit type is C, it is determined that the jackpot is F (short round big hit for 5 rounds), and if the small hit type is D, the big hit is G (short round big hit for 10 rounds). If the small hit type is E, it is determined that the big hit E (15 round round short hit big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  Next, based on the small hit type, the start of the small hit is set (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit medium flag 203k are set to ON (S610). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process of the values when there is a start prize.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S701). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S705, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S707 to S712, the same processing as that for the processing from S701 to S706 is also executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference with respect to the winning of the second entrance 640 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. And when it determines with the ball | bowl not having won the 2nd entrance 640 in the process of S707 (S707: No), a prefetch process is performed after the process of S712 (S713). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, the prefetching process (S713) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S713).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 44, S713), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is the first special symbol (S802). ).

  In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1. Based on the result, the lottery result, the jackpot type and the jackpot type are acquired (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the jackpot determination result, and the jackpot type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the jackpot type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor accompanying the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S901). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S901: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S904). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S905).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

  Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the normal symbol lottery, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “12 to 239”, the normal symbol is off. (See FIG. 26D).

  After that, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S908 is a normal symbol win (S909). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S909: Yes), Is set (S910), and the process proceeds to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S909, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S909: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S912.

  When the process of S910 or S911 ends, it is determined in the process of S912 whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S912: Yes), the middle / short time flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S912: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this process is terminated. As described above, except for the big hit of the special symbol, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the variation display time becomes very short as “4 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. The ball enters the entrance 640 easily.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S914 or S915 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S916, if the variation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S916 (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S910, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S911, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S910 or S911.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S918). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S918: Yes), the electric accessory control process is set (S919), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). FIG. It is the flowchart which showed S919).

  In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-shortage hit flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time-short-term hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time-short-term hit flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time-short-term hit flag 203q is set (S1003). When the time is short (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal time state of the symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened (for 3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds), set to open (3 seconds) (S1004), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S1001, if the short / medium time flag 203q is not on (that is, off) (S1001: Yes), or if it is not in the short time (S1003: No) in S1003, the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol. Therefore, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 second), closed (0.1 second), and open (0.1 second). (S1005, the process is terminated).

  Thus, in the normal symbol time-short state, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is “open (0.1 seconds), closed (0.1 seconds), open ( 0.1 second) → opening (3 seconds), closing (5 seconds), opening (3 seconds) ”, which is very long, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In addition, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. Then, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1103).

  If the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol retention ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, a general-purpose prefetching process is executed (S1106).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the general-purpose prefetching process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of this general-purpose prefetching process (S1106). In the general-purpose prefetching process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, prior discrimination based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

  Next, based on the result of prior discrimination, a hit prior determination result and a variation time determination result are acquired (S1202). After that, a normal winning prize information command is set (S1203), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the through gate passing process.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the general-purpose prefetching process (S1106) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1107: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If the special symbol is not big hit (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is being made (S1108: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If the second special symbol is not changing (S1109: No), it is determined whether the time is short (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the time is short (S1110: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If the time is not short (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, even if the ball has not passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol retained ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the general-purpose prefetching process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the V inlet passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V-entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V entrance passage processing (S108), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S1301). If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the player is hitting a small hit (S1301: Yes), a V-entrance passing command is set (S1302), and this process ends. If it is not a small hit (S1302: No), it is a case where a ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, an error command is set (S1303), and this process Exit.

  The V-entrance passage command set in the processing of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the passage of the V entrance to the display control device 114. Thereby, the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

  Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V passing process, first, the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V passing jackpot type is set to ON (S1401). S1402). Then, a V passing command is set (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). In the process of S1404, if it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit B (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than small hit B), and the small hit type value is set. Only when the small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) is set. Therefore, when the small pass type value is the small win B and the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally executed. This is considered to be the case where the ball is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the processing of S1405, an error output is executed and an illegal act can be found.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1612. As will be described later in the processing of S1716 in FIG. 53, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) or the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command, the round number command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). Then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Determine whether. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning port 65a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and a small hit control process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 are executed ( S1705). In the small hitting control process, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the opening / closing door 650f1. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the open / close door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  When the process of S1705 ends, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), Open / close control of the object is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in S1004 or the processing of S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) is completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, and S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the short time variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the variation pattern is set by the process of S505, S510, or S512, the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation set by the processes of S405, S410, S412 or the processes of S505, S510, S512 of the normal fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40) or the short-time fluctuation start process (see FIG. 41). When the variation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the short time variation start process (see FIG. 41). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, and S411 or the processing of S504, S509, and S511.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) or the process of S915, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S910 or the processing of S911 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45). To do.

  Next, a storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1711: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1712, S1713).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1713).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1710, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, the power-off process after S1714 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1710 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1709 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON by the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1801, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and an opening command is set (S1803).

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot. When the processing of S1803 ends, the storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1805). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is on. If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1805 (S1805: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set ( S1808). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the number of rounds accumulated in the jackpot that is continued on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, the first variable winning device 65 (for example, , A total of 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when winning.

  In the processing of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. This process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the jackpot end (S1811). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the timing of the jackpot end.

  In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the big hit end (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit middle flag 203i is set to OFF (S1813).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a big hit B (S1814). In the process of S1814, when it is determined that it is not a big hit B (7R time no big hit) (S1814: No), the hour / counter counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when it is determined that it is a big hit B (7R time short hit big hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, it selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a jackpot end effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hitting control process (S1705) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, 2 is a process for opening or closing the open / close door 650f1 of the variable winning device 650.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol small hit is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hitting start flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S610 of the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the special symbol small hitting is started. In the process of S1901, when the special symbol small hitting is started (S1901: Yes), the small hitting start flag 203j is set to OFF (S1902), and the small hitting start command is set (S1903).

  The small hitting start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting start command, it transmits the display small hitting start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hitting start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect for starting the small hitting.

  When the process of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are turned on based on the open scenario (S1904), the operation of the staying member 650n is started (S1905), and this process is terminated.

  The release scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) described above, and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened in all the small hit games, and the ball can enter the second variable prize-winning device 650. On the other hand, a ball that has entered the second variable prize-winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 only at the small hit A, C, D, or E when the channel solenoid 209c is turned on. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are small hit types to which a big hit is given, and the small hits B are small hit types to which no big hit is given.

  Further, when the operation of the staying member 650n is started (the staying solenoid 209b is turned on) in the process of S1905, it becomes possible for one ball to stay in the sorting destination area 650h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is not the timing for starting the special symbol small hit (S1901: No), it is determined whether the special symbol small hit is being made (S1906). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the small hitting medium flag 203k is on. If the special symbol is not being hit in the process of S1906 (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1906 that the special symbol is being hit (S1906: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V inlet closing condition is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, for example, the second variable winning device 650) If a total of 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have entered the second specific prize opening 650a.

  In the processing of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is set to close the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. The retention solenoid 209b is set to OFF in order to end the operation of the retention member 650n (S1909), and the present processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the small hitting end timing is reached after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V inlet closing condition is established. As a result, since the small hitting end process (off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the stay member 650n is finished, the balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 650e3. It is possible to enter the ball with certainty.

  In the process of S1910, if it is the timing of the small hit end (S1910: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203k is set to OFF (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is not the timing of the small hit end (S1910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the small hit end processing (S1912) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S1912). This small hit end process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the small hit end timing in the small hit control process.

  In the small hit end process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is set to OFF (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is ON (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), this is a case where the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

  Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n ( S2004). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot medium flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the hour / middle counter 230g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V passing big hit type value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not on (S2002: No), since the ball does not pass the V winning switch 650e3 to the small hit ball, no big win is given. In order to end, a small hit end command is set (S2009). Then, the process of S2008 is performed and this process is complete | finished.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, it selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a jackpot end effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640.

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by an electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), it is then determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is set to be closed (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not the time-saving operation is being performed (S2106). ). If it is determined in the processing of S2106 that the time-saving operation is not being performed (S2106: No), this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time-saving operation is being performed (S2106: Yes), a close command is set (S2107), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), it is then determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), it is then determined whether or not a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S2111). When it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S2111: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and if it is determined in S2111 that a ball has entered the second entrance 640. (S2111: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is cleared (S2113), and this process ends.

  Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control process (S1709) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750.

  In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201). When it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not greater than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), it is next determined whether or not the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202). If it is determined that it is on (S2202: Yes), storage cancellation (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201: Yes), the process of S2201 to S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). When it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), the storage close (that is, the storage valve 750a is closed) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this process ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S3119 (see FIG. 60) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), it executes the power-off process in S3119. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process in S3119 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S3119, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S3119, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 in the state in which the power-off flag is turned on leads to the processing of this start-up process instantaneously. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S3009 is that when the process from S3004 to S3006 is reached via the process in S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S3102 to S3111 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3112, the variable display setting process of S3113, the effect state setting process of S3114, and the specific effect setting process of S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the S3113 processing in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be changed. Based on this, it is possible to make a setting related to the variation effect without delay. Further, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the display on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed without delay to the display content corresponding to the current gaming state based on the command received by the command determination process. Can be made.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later are set (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S3108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, a variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S3114. In the process of S3114, an effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, each effect mode (the display mode of the 3rd symbol, the display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set for the effect state to correspond to the gaming state. The process is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3114 is completed, the process proceeds to S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In the specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the variation effect for indicating the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is executed. Details of the specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power interruption processing is executed (S3119). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3112). This command determination processing (S3112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The variation pattern related command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol or a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol. The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

  In the process of S3201, when it is determined that a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201: Yes), a variation pattern related process (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern related process is used to extract a variation pattern based on the variation pattern related command output (received) from the main control device 110 and cause the display control device 114 to execute an effect display. Here, the variation pattern related process (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern related process (S3202). This variation pattern related process (S3202) is a process for determining which symbol the variation pattern command received this time is, and executing the processing corresponding to the received symbol based on the determination result. . In this variation pattern related process (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special diagram) (S3301). If it is determined in step S3301 that the command is a special pattern variation pattern command (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the fluctuation pattern command is for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), first, as shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time is a fluctuation pattern command for special figure. (S3301). Here, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302). If it is determined that it is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON, and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set. Is done.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d (special figure fluctuation start flag) provided in the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3305), and this process is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the variation pattern-related command received this time is not a special pattern variation pattern command, the universal variation start flag 223u is turned on (S3306), and the received variation pattern is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is the special pattern variation pattern type in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). In a variable display setting process (see FIG. 66), which will be described later, the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect are displayed to the display control device 114. This is used when notifying (when setting a special symbol display variation pattern command).

  Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3201 that a variation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3203). When it is determined that a stop type command (one of the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 stop type command, or the common figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type When the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON and the normal symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to ON.

  When the processing of S3204 is finished, the stop type (completely out (out), reach out, small hit, big hit (win)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command is received from the main controller 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  In the process of S3207. When a normal symbol reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is received, a value of a normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) (that is, the number of reserved balls in a normal symbol variation display) is extracted and extracted. In accordance with the counter value, the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is also updated.

  When the processing of S3207 is completed, the number of reserved balls related processing is executed (S3208). In the reserved ball number related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the reserved ball number shown in FIG. Here, the retained ball number related process (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number related process (S3208).

  When the reserved ball number related process (S3208) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is an update of the special 2 (special figure 2) reserved ball number (S3401). If it is determined that the number of specially reserved balls has not been updated (S3401: No), that is, if the currently received reserved ball number command is not the reserved ball number of Special Figure 2, this process is terminated. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is an update of the special 2 reserved ball number (S3401: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether or not the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has shifted from “0” to “1”, that is, a state where there is no special 2 reserved balls. To do.

  If it is determined in the process of S3402 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 reserve flag 223n is set to ON, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is performed (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. (S3404: Yes), a victory command for display is set (S3405), and this process ends.

  When the display victory command is set, the character “win” is displayed as an effect result of the end effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous to the player. It is informed that the current state continues. If the ball wins the special figure 2 during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or predetermined as in the present embodiment. You may make it alert | report that the ball | bowl was winning in the special figure 2 at the time of completion | finish of the completion | finish effect performed for the period for which it was performed.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which a ball has won a special figure 2 (second entrance 640) and, as an effect, notification that a ball has won a special figure 2 (second entrance 640) If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur at the timing of the performance, for example, during the end effect execution period, the reserved symbol that displays the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be deleted. Thereby, although the end effect is continuing, it is possible to prevent the player from notifying the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3402 that the special 2 reserved ball number has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), it is then determined whether the special 2 reserved ball number has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). ) If it is determined that it has been updated (S3406: Yes), the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and this process ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) or passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a start winning, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the main controller by the processing of S2210. 110 can be set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol. Even if it deviates from the value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol The value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  In the process of S3206, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). If it is determined in the process of S3209 that a winning information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), a winning information related process is executed (S3210). In this winning information related process (S3210), various flags and various counters that are referred to in order to set various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, the change of the special symbol on hold is started before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command has been transmitted. Suggestion notification can be made, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the winning information related process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (S3210). When the winning information related process (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning information related command received this time is a winning information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that the command is a prize information command relating to a special figure (S3501: Yes), the received prize information command is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a (S3502), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3501 that the received prize information related command is not a prize information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (a prize information command related to a regular figure) (S3501: No), a prize is awarded. The information is stored in the winning prize information storage area 223t (S3503), and this process ends.

  In a game machine in which special symbol winning information (special chart prefetching) and normal symbol winning information (standard chart prefetching) are executed, it is output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. The output timing of each winning information command is the same, and when determining by the winning information related process (S3210), a priority is set for each winning information command, and only the winning information command having a higher priority is determined. You may comprise as follows. As a result, it is not necessary to execute different determination processing for each winning information command, the processing load can be reduced, and the types and number of winning information commands determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side are irregular. Therefore, an effect unintended by the player can be easily executed.

  That is, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired when a ball enters the respective entrances (first entrance 64 and second entrance 640) or through gate 67 in main controller 110. Since each of the counter values is information indicating the result of the determination performed in advance before the lottery based on the entry is executed or the value based on the counter value, the sound lamp control device 113 Even if the winning information command is not acquired on the side, the game will not be hindered, so if the prescribed condition is met (the special winning prize information command and the universal winning prize information command are received simultaneously) In such a case, the above-described effects can be achieved by intentionally preventing one winning information command from being acquired. Furthermore, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of acquisition conditions (entrance balls) for one symbol (first special symbol), such as the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b of the present embodiment, a prize is awarded. The information command includes information that can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side as to which winning information command is based on which acquisition condition is satisfied, and processing based on the winning information command based on the identification result May be varied. Specifically, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on a winning at the first left entrance 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (so-called pre-reading effect). May be configured to be performed more frequently than when receiving a winning information command based on entering the right first entrance 64b. Thereby, even if it is the same 1st special symbol, the frequency with which a prefetch effect is performed can be varied easily. According to the configuration shown in the above-described example, during the game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left-handed game), the pre-reading effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (can be executed frequently), and the right first During a game aimed at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), the pre-reading effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with low probability). Thereby, the production | generation aspect according to the game state can be set.

  Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3209 that no winning information related command has been received (S3209: No), it is then determined whether a winning related command has been received (S3211). When a hit related command is received (S3211: Yes), a hit related process (S3212) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit-related process (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S3212). The hit related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit related command has been received.

  In the hit-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S3601). If it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting (notifying) the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that a round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter (S3605), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S3606). In the process of S3606, if it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a display jackpot end command is set (S3607), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3606 that a jackpot end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S3608).

  If it is determined in the process of S3608 that a small hitting start command has been received (S3608: Yes), a display small hitting start command is set based on the small hitting type (S3609), and this process ends. In the process of S3608, when it is determined that the small hitting start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether or not a small hitting end command has been received (S3610).

  In the process of S3610, if it is determined that a small hitting end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a display small hitting end command is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S3611). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not a V pass command has been received (S3612).

  If it is determined in the process of S3612 that a V passing command has been received (S3612: Yes), a process based on entering the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the display V passing command is displayed. Is set (S3613), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, there is a measuring means for measuring the number of reception times of the V passing command during the period when the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to ON, and for display corresponding to the number of times measured by the measuring means. The V passing command can be set. Specifically, the display V passing command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can be made to aim for more V passages, and the game can be performed eagerly.

  Other conditions may be set as conditions for setting the contents of the V pass command for display. For example, the number of small hit games that have not passed V and the number of small hit games that have passed V, respectively. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the contents of the display V passing command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. This allows a player who has executed many small hit games that do not pass V to perform an effect that congratulates that when V passes, or a player who executes a small percentage of low hit games that pass V On the other hand, an effect of congratulating that effect can be executed.

  If it is determined in step S3612 that a V-pass command has not been received (S3612: No), this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S3211 that a hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), it is next determined whether a notification command has been received (S3213). When it is determined that the notification command is received in the processing of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this processing is terminated. The state command received here includes a normal state command for indicating that the gaming state is a normal state, a big hit state command for indicating that the gaming state is a big hit state, and a gaming state is a small hit state. A small hit state command for indicating that the game state is a short-time state, a short-time state command for indicating that the gaming state is a short-time state, that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating Such as an operation state command for indicating a game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side.

  The state command described above is configured to be received from the main controller 110 when the gaming state is shifted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the contents of the received status command from being complicated, and to reduce the processing load. Further, when a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased, the state command currently set in the power failure recovery process is output. Note that the output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set gaming state may be output periodically, or the specific output condition is satisfied when the gaming state is not shifted. In this case (for example, during a jackpot game, when the game reaches a predetermined round, or when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number in the normal state), the state command may be output. As a result, the current gaming state can be grasped more reliably on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3215 that no status command has been received (S3215: No), then a process according to another command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110, and when it is determined that a stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, When an entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each entrance provided on the board 13 is received, the number of entrances is accumulated for each type of entrance into which the ball entered. , Processing for setting the number of incoming balls for display is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S3113). This variation display setting process (S3113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) corresponding to the main symbol which is mainly effect-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed according to the set effect state. Designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is set for each of the above-described symbols and notified to the display control device 114. Then, based on the received display variation pattern command and the content of the received display effect state command by the display control device 114, the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (second An effect display corresponding to the symbol to be displayed in the display area Dn is displayed. Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced in a gaming machine in which an effect display corresponding to a plurality of effect states is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the special symbol variation display this time is based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S3702 to S3706 is executed to determine.

  More specifically, first, the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3702), then the extracted variation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 223g is ON (S3703). S3704). If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the hour / middle flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the hour / middle flag is set to off (S3705), and the special pattern display variation pattern command is set ( S3706) and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, when it is determined that the hour / middle flag 223g is not on (is off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

  When executing the process of S3706, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the value is subtracted. Based on this, the data in the special figure winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). If it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is off in the stop type selection flag 223e (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the processing of S3707, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is on among the stop type selection flag 223e (S3707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (for special figure) is turned off. (S3708), the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). Thereafter, the normal map display setting process (S3712) is executed, and this process ends.

  This normal figure change display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display a change display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a change pattern command related to the normal figure change is received from the main controller 110. Here, the common map display setting process (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map change display setting process (S3712). When the normal map change display setting process (S3712) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the normal change start flag 223u is set to ON. If it is determined that the normal-use fluctuation start flag 223u is off (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command related to the normal figure has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal-use fluctuation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed mode of the current special symbol fluctuation display Each process of S3802-S3810 for determining is performed.

  Of the various types of processing executed in the general map fluctuation display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the same processing as the fluctuation display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. Detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the common-use variation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), the special-purpose maps S3702 and S3703 executed in the above-described variation display setting process (S3113). For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 in which the target is changed to the usual diagram is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is executed is in a short time state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the short time remaining period information stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time-short state (S3804: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is finished (in the case of winning, the electric accessory 640a) It is determined whether or not the timing of setting the operation content is in the short-time state (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the short time remaining period information stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the obtained fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a short time state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. To do.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the variation end timing (electrical appliance 640a operation start timing) is in the shortest time (S3805: Yes), the normal map valid flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), and then the variation It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the short time end (S3807). In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the variation end timing is within 2 seconds of the short-time end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display variation pattern command (for normal use) ) Is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

  On the other hand, if it is determined No in S3804 or S3805, the normal map valid flag 223q is set to OFF (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3810 described above. If it is determined in the process of S3807 that the variation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the short time end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3810.

  Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing is terminated. Note that the processing executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is the special stop type command in S3707 to S3711 and the normal stop type command in S3811 to S3815. The only difference is that the rest of the content is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). This effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state in accordance with the state command output from main controller 110 and the current game situation, and the effect state set in this process is set. By outputting the information based on the display (display effect command) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

  When the performance state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, state information (gaming state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This state information is stored in the state storage area 223k based on the state command received from the main controller 110 in the above-described command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current gaming state on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, with reference to the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, it is determined whether the current status (status information stored in the status storage area 223k) indicates the start of jackpot (S3902). If it is determined that the jackpot starts (S3902: Yes), the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3902 that the jackpot does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot end is indicated (S3904).

  If it is determined in the process of S3904 that the end of the jackpot is indicated (S3904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not to shift to the short time state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination in S3905 is performed based on jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the time shift state is to be entered (S3905: Yes), the hour / middle flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process shifts to S3918.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905 that the state does not shift to the time-saving state (S3905: No), the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to off (S3907), the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to off (S3908), The end effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S3909), and the process proceeds to S3918.

  If it is determined in step S3904 that the end of the jackpot is not indicated (S3904: No), it is then determined whether it is time to end the time reduction state (S3910). If it is determined that it is time to end the short-time state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is reserved is set on. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S3911). If it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (is off) (S3911: No), the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3918. Similarly, when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process proceeds to S3918.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the flag 223i is set to ON, and when the time saving state is not given after the jackpot ends or when the time saving state ends, the special drawing 2 of FIG. When the on-hold storage is “0”, the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to be off. As a result, during the jackpot game, during the short-time state, and when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed when shifting from the short-time state to the normal state, (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the consecutive resort flag 223i can be continuously set to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times that the jackpot has been executed, the number of winning balls, etc.) during the period in which the consecutive resort flag 223i is turned on, various values in the consecutive resort mode are easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having the extended game mode that shifts to a plurality of different gaming states, the process can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3910, when it is determined that it is not the timing at which the time reduction state ends (not the time reduction end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is a small hitting start timing (S3913), and at the small hitting start timing If it is determined that there is (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3914 that the current state is not the normal state (short time state) (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S3918.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the current is not the small hitting start timing (S3913: No), it is then determined whether the current is the small hitting end timing (S3916), and the small hitting end timing is determined. (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S3917), and the process proceeds to S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, when it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small hit end timing executed during the short-time state), the process of S3917 The process proceeds to S3918 without executing the process.

  In the process of S3916, when it is determined that the current time is not the small hitting end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to S3918. In the process of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this process ends.

  Next, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect determining process (S3115). The specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the first embodiment, a bonus effect (see FIG. 21) executed when the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time-saving state. When the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored on hold in the time-short state, and the remaining period (fluctuation remaining period of special figure 1) in the time-short state becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds) The end effect (refer to FIG. 19B) executed at the time is executed as a specific effect.

  When the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received content of the specific effect is displayed regardless of the variable display state of each symbol (whether or not it is changing). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to ON (S4001), and the consecutive resort flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4001: No), the process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to on (S4001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to on (S4002). If it is determined that there is not (S4002: No), it is determined whether or not the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

  In the process of S4003, when the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), a display bonus effect command is set (S4004), and the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005). ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or in the process of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON. If it is determined that it has been performed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

  In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). If it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. If it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the short time remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

  In the process of S4008, the information indicating the short time remaining period stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h is read and the determination is performed. In the process of S4008, when it is determined that the remaining time is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), a display extended villa end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4006 that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON in the process of S4007 (S4007). : Yes) skips the processing of S4008 to S4010, and ends this processing as it is.

  As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state where the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to ON as the first specific effect. When the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during (short-time state) (when the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the bonus effect (see FIG. 22) is executed. Yes. By executing this privilege effect, it is possible to provide the player with a high value-added effect, so that the player can be motivated to play the game in a short time state. Further, when the bonus effect is executed, the main figure main symbol Dmc is not displayed, so that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 cannot be increased (the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit). In this state, it is possible to suppress the effect of hitting the ball entering the second entrance 640, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, since the above-described privilege effect is configured to continue to be executed until the consecutive resort flag 223i is set to OFF (until the consecutive resort mode ends), the added value is added to the player. Can provide a high performance for a long time (at least the period until the reserved memory number of Special Figure 2 is exhausted), so the high value-added production ends in a short period of time and the player's willingness to play It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as lowering.

  Further, as the second specific effect, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired during the state where the consecutive-village flag 223i is set to ON (short-time state) (the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 is “ In the state of “0”), when the remaining period of the short-time state becomes a predetermined period (remaining 10 seconds), an end effect (see FIG. 19B) suggesting that the extended-village mode is ended. It is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the possibility that the extended game mode will end, and will end before a period advantageous to the player (the extended game mode) is not noticed. The occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed.

  Next, the counter update process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (S3111). This counter update process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed fluctuation display. Information related to the remaining time (short time remaining period) of the fluctuation time referred to here is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 is referred to when setting the production contents.

  When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current value of the variation time counter 223j is “0” (S4101). If it is determined that the value is “0” (S4101: Yes), that is, the state in which the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not updated (the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation during the short-time state has not been executed), It is determined whether the current time is short (short time) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the current time is short (S4102: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the timing at which the fluctuation of FIG. 1 starts (S4103). If it is determined that the timing is when the change starts (S4103: Yes), the value of the change time counter 223j is set to “1” (S4104), and the remaining change time is based on the value of the change time counter 223j. A period (short time remaining period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated short time remaining period is stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h (S4105).

  Thereafter, a short remaining time command for display is set (S4106), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the current time is not within the time saving (during the time saving state) (S4102: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S4103 that the current time is not the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (S4103: No) skips the processing of S4104 to S4106 and ends this processing.

  In the processing of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the variation time counter 223j is not “0” (S4101: No), that is, the state where the value of the variation time counter 223j has already been updated (see FIG. 1 in the time-saving state). In the state in which the fluctuation is executed), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (whether 150 seconds have passed) (S4107). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not “150,000” (“less than 150,000”) (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is incremented by “1” (S4108). The process proceeds to S4105 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4107 that the value of the variation time counter 223j is “150,000” (S4107: Yes), the value of the variation time counter 223j is set to “0” (S4109). Transition to processing.

  In the present embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the short-time state is all defined as “150 seconds” regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, FIG. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” corresponding to “150 seconds”, but the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of FIG. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be selected from (variation time), the upper limit value of the variation time counter 223j can be reset based on the contents of the variation pattern to be executed (variation time to be set). It may be configured to determine whether the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit value.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S5102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S5001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S5102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S5101. The processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S5102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 71. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S5005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 82A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S6502 of FIG. 82A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is received, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 36) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S5301: No), it means that all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S5302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S5303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S5305) are used. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) The stop type table corresponding to the chance) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, Transition to processing.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S5404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S5405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read (S5501). Then, among the variation display data tables corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, the variation display data table corresponding to the effect state read by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variation display data table is determined. The data is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S5503. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S5505, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the display pattern command processing in the present embodiment, the display content (effect content) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the sound lamp control device 113. ) Is determined so that the display contents (the display mode of each symbol, the display number display mode of each symbol) corresponding to the display effect state command output (received) from the sound lamp control device 113 are determined. It is composed. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, the display suitable for each effect state can be performed. Further, the display control device 114 determines the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command, and executes the process of determining the display contents. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 corresponds to each effect state. It is not necessary to set a display variation pattern command, and the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command process, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the display variation pattern command, the display processing described above is executed for the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, and only the display contents corresponding to the currently set effect state are included in the player. You may comprise so that it may be displayed visually. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and processing for transmitting a layer other than the layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed, or the effect state that is set The layer corresponding to is placed on the foreground. As a result, even when the presentation state changes while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to respond immediately. In addition, an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which common display content is always displayed regardless of the effect state to be set is displayed on another layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the variation pattern command.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the processing returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S5603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the task process (S5304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S5603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S5602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S5406 that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5701). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S5702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S5701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5702. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S5702, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S5408 that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S5410). If this is the case (S5410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S5411), and processing returns to S5401.

  Details of the error command process (S5411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S5802). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5802, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S5410 (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is displayed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S5412 that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether there is a hit related command (S5440). In the process of S5440, when it is determined that there is a hit related command (S5440: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5440 that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processing is executed (S5414), and the process returns to step S5401.

  In the processing of S5401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processing of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 is executed again. The processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, The command determination process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 75 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 75 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the hit-related command processing (S5441) will be described. This hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit-related command.

  In the win related command process (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). If it is determined in step S5901 that there is a display start command (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command processing is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to step S5903.

  Details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6005), This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the process proceeds to S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process proceeds to S5905.

  Details of the round number command processing (S5904) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S5904). This round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command is received in the hit related command process (FIG. 77), and the number of rounds in the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect at the time of display.

  In the round number command processing (S5904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is finished, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

  If it is determined in step S5905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process proceeds to step S5907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (FIG. 77), and a third effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game is provided. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is first determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5905 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5907.

  When the process of S5905 or S5906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hitting start command (S5907). If it is determined in the processing of S5907 that there is a display small hitting start command (S5907: Yes), the small hitting start command processing is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to S5909.

  Details of the small hitting start command process (S5908) will be described here. This small hitting start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77) that a small hitting start command has been received, and suggests the start of a small hitting game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting start command processing (S5908), first, a small hitting start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hitting start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hitting start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF, and this processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5907, if it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

  When the process of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5909). In the process of S5909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910), and this process ends.

  Details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described here. This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77) that the small hit end command has been received, and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S5303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 79. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S6406, the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S6208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S6209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S5304), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S6215 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is off instead of on (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6217), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  If the demonstration display flag is on in the process of S6216 (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, details of the transfer setting process (S5305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S6501, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S6602). In the process of S6602, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S6704), and the process proceeds to step S6705.

  In the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S 6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S 6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the processing of S6705, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the processing proceeds to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S6714), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S6715). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S6717, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S6717 (S6717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S6717 (S6717: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S6718). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 73B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Whether or not the game machine such as a pachinko machine changes the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter Some perform the first lottery. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed by a game ball entering the start port in a state that is easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times until the predetermined lottery result is displayed. In a game machine that is set continuously, the probability that the lottery is determined to be advantageous to the player in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. There was a bug that it would end up.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the reserved memory of FIG. 2 that is advantageous to the player is acquired during the period in which the fluctuation of FIG. Since it is possible to make the period possible, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In a gaming machine in which a lottery of lots of symbols is executed, there are some which notify a player by displaying a symbol display for showing the lottery result on the display means (the third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are variably displayed at various times, making it difficult for the player to understand the game content.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in in the current gaming state, that is, Since the symbols that can most affect the game result are displayed with emphasis over other symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the first embodiment described above, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, short-time state, jackpot state, etc.) set. Configured differently. Thereby, it is possible to change the contents of the game while grasping the current game state with respect to the player, and it is possible to further suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the first embodiment, since it is possible to provide different game characteristics depending on the type of special symbol variation executed when the state is shifted to the short-time state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. Can do.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The first embodiment described above is configured such that when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time-shortening state, the time-shortening state ends, and in the time-shortening state where the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol It was configured to acquire the reserved memory.

  And when the change of the 1st special symbol in the short-time state is completed, if the reserved storage of the 2nd special symbol has been acquired, the change (lottery) of the 2nd special symbol is executed next, and the change The jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the time-saving state again. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol during the time-shortening state ends, If the reserved memory could not be acquired, the system is configured to shift to the normal state as it is.

  In the first embodiment configured as described above, the end timing of the shortened state becomes the end timing of one change of the first special symbol, so that the player can easily predict the end timing of the shortened state. There is a problem. Also, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different variation times for the variation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is increased. There was a problem of letting it go.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time-saving state, the player can continue to acquire a state advantageous to the player. If it is not, the gameability is easy for the player to understand that the state advantageous to the player ends, but there is a problem that the gameability becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing for ending the time-saving state. Specifically, when the first special symbol change (lottery) is executed twice or the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed once, the termination condition for the short-time state is set. .

  By configuring in this way, when the first special symbol change of the first rotation (short rotation first rotation) during the time-shortening state is finished, if the reserved storage of the second special symbol is not secured, the time-shortening Variation (lottery) of the first special symbol of the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation (short rotation first rotation) in the time-short state is completed, if the reserved storage of the second special symbol is secured, the second special symbol stored in the reserved state Symbol variation (lottery) is executed.

  Therefore, in the time-saving state, when the variation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time-shortening is completed, the game where the reserved memory of the second special symbol is continued and the reserved memory of the second special symbol are stored. The case where the used variation (lottery) is executed can be provided according to the reserved storage status of the second special symbol.

  Furthermore, in this 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that the change pattern (variation time) of the 1st special symbol performed during a time-short state can be selected from two or more. Therefore, the time-short state period (the variation period of the first special symbol executed during the time-short state) can be diversified by a combination of a plurality of variation patterns, and the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time reduction state period is set by a combination of a plurality of variation patterns, when a plurality of variation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in a gaming machine with one time reduction as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in this 2nd Embodiment, when the fluctuation | variation (lottery) of a 2nd special symbol is performed once, it is comprised so that a time-short state may be complete | finished. Thus, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the first rotation in the short time, the winning small hit is the least advantageous for the player (executed when the ball is passed through a specific area). If the number of rounds of the big hit game is smaller than the other small hits), the second special symbol of the second short rotation will be executed when the game is executed so that the ball does not pass through the specific area. It is possible to prevent the execution of a special game such as executing a game aiming for fluctuations of the game.

  In addition, when the change (lottery) result of the first special symbol in the first time reduction is the small win, the small hit game is executed after the end of the change of the first special symbol in the first time reduction. Because the short-time state is maintained during the small hit game (because the short-time end condition is not satisfied), the gameability for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol and the second variable winning device during the small hit game period It is possible to set a period in which a plurality of games can be executed simultaneously, such as a game in which a ball is entered in 650 and a ball is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 630). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gaming property, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, as shown in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol fluctuation that has started to fluctuate during the time reduction state is set as the termination condition of the time reduction state, the special symbol fluctuation for the first rotation of the time reduction is Since the small hit game executed after the game ends is not in the short-time state, it is not possible to provide a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the short-time state, a first variation pattern (short-time state) in which the player can execute a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern longer than the normal time fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal time fluctuation time during the short-time state) that makes it difficult to execute the game that acquires the reserved memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice in succession, the time-short state is not substantially given (a game in which reserved storage of the second special symbol is acquired during the time-short state) If the first variation pattern is selected twice in succession, it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time reduction state with high probability. A state is granted. In addition, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are selected, a short time state in which the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

  That is, based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the short-time state, the expectation degree of acquisition of the second special symbol during the short-time state can be made different, thereby providing a game that is surprising to the player can do. Even if the jackpot type that shifts to the short-time state after the end of the jackpot game and the jackpot type that does not shift to the short-time state are prepared, even if the short-time state is given after the end of all jackpot games, the first Based on the selection result of the special symbol variation pattern, it is possible to set the substantial short-time state rush rate, and thus it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity due to preparing a plurality of jackpot types.

  In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the short-time state, and configured to refer to a different variation pattern selection table based on the gaming state and gaming situation, It is possible to make the actual time-short state entry ratio more diverse.

  The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration using a plurality of short-time end conditions) may be used for gaming machines having gaming characteristics other than the second embodiment, for example, the small special winning of the second special symbol If some of the small hit types are set among the plurality of small hit types set at the time, a small hit game in which the ball cannot pass (is difficult) through the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. You may use for such a game machine.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of times of fluctuation (lottery) is set as an end condition of the short-time state based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol, but a number of times more than that may be set. . Furthermore, the total number of times of the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of variations (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as an end condition in the short-time state. , The number of changes in the normal symbol, the result of the change (lottery) of the special symbol, and various bonuses provided in the pachinko machine 10 (electrical bonus 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) The end condition of the short-time state may be set based on the operation state (the presence / absence of operation, the number of operations).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and an MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time-shortening state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 85 (a), differences from the first embodiment described above (differences from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)) will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85 (a) is an example showing a display screen in a state where the reserved memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired at the time when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed, the second special symbol reserved memory is not acquired (the special symbol 2 main reserved symbol display area Dm5 indicates the number of reserved symbols). If not, the first special symbol variation (lottery) is started as the variation in the second rotation in the short time. Here, a variation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the second rotation in the short time, and for the display of “remaining time 0 seconds” displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, “+150 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of “150 seconds” is a display for indicating the fluctuation time of the second rotation in the short time.

  And in the 1st main display area Dm, the character of "still still" is displayed as a continuation alert display mode which shows that the game for acquiring the reservation memory of special figure 2 continues. By displaying such a display screen, it may be difficult for the player to know how long the short-time state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is executed) will continue. It is possible to play games with expectation to the end.

  It should be noted that the “remaining time” displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is the time before the remaining time of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the first speed reduction becomes “0”, that is, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the first time reduction. You may add and display the value which shows a part or all of the fluctuation | variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation which can become the 2nd rotation. In this case, when the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation in the short time is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired, the addition display is executed. Good. As a result, even if the remaining time is reduced, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, at the time when the first rotation of the time reduction is finished, the game for obtaining the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is executed as the fluctuation of the special figure 1 of the second rotation of the time reduction when the special storage of the special figure 2 is not acquired. When the difficult second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the normal diagram variation time during the short-time state) is selected, the display for adding the remaining time as shown in FIG. The display screen (short-time state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period in which the time-short state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation for the second time-shortening is executed.

  That is, when the above-described second variation pattern is set, the time reduction state is substantially ended, and therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the time reduction 2 is set despite the time reduction state. When the special figure 1 change of the rotation is executed, a time-short state end display is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing not to the end timing of the internal gaming state (short-time state) but to the gaming state in which the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 can be acquired. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  It should be noted that during the period in which the time-short state end display is displayed, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 for the second speed reduction executed and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 that decreases when the second speed reduction is executed (holding) Since the number of memories is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time reduction state is made different based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time reduction state. If the game state advantageous to the player cannot be given even in the time-short state internally, a display indicating the end of the time-short state is executed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In the second embodiment, when the second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the normal variation time in the short-time state) in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is difficult to execute is set, In other words, even if it is in a short-time state, it is assumed that a gaming state advantageous to the player cannot be granted, but in addition to that, when the usual figure fluctuation time is longer than the remaining time in the short-time state (at the end of the usual figure fluctuation) Even if the time-short state ends), even if it is internally time-short state, it is determined that a game state advantageous to the player cannot be given, and a display indicating the end of the time-short state is executed. Also good.

  Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 change in the first rotation in the short time is won by a small win will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85 (b) is an example showing a display screen in a state where the special figure 1 wins a small hit at the time of the completion of the first rotation of the time reduction and there is one reserved storage of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed as “341”, which is a stop display mode indicating that the special figure 1 main symbol Dma has won the small hit, and the main reserved symbol display. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory in FIG. 2 is displayed.

  The first sub display area Ds1 displays “remaining time 0 seconds” indicating that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 for the first rotation in the short time has ended, and is further displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In contrast to the displayed “remaining time 0 second”, “+60 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of “60 seconds” is a display for showing the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small win winning of FIG.

  That is, although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is executed twice or when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed once, the time is shortened. The state is set to end, and when the variation (lottery) in FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the termination condition for the short time state is not satisfied. Therefore, the short-time state is continued during the small hitting game executed by the small hitting winning in FIG. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period in which the small hit game is executed.

  In this way, the player has a game period in which a game for allowing the player to enter the second variable prize-winning device 650, which is opened by a small hit game, and a game for acquiring the reserved memory shown in FIG. As a special game period notification mode for notifying the player, “charge combo activation” is displayed in the first display area Dm.

  Then, when the small hit game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the main display symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed. Executed. In addition, if the small hit game executed in the small hit winning of FIG. 1 is a small hit that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), “V” is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the special pattern 1 variation pattern table 202d4 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, although details will be described later, the termination condition of the time reduction state is also changed.

  The special pattern 1 short-time fluctuation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 compared to the special figure 1 short-time fluctuation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. Is different in that different variation patterns (variation times) are set based on

  Specifically, even if the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is “Out”, “Small Bonus”, or “Large Bonus”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. A variation pattern with a variation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of “100 to 198”, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set. By comprising in this way, the game content in a time-short state can be varied greatly with the variation pattern selected.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, a special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation has been executed during the time reduction state. If the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time reduction. It is shown. This special 2 fluctuation flag 203r has determined that the current fluctuation is special figure 2 in the short time fluctuation start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). In this case (S551 in FIG. 91: Yes), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91), and is referred to in the time reduction end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90). After the value is set to “0”, it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

  As described above, at the time of starting the special figure fluctuation, the result of determining which fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to ON), and the time is shortened. By determining whether or not to terminate the time-saving state based on the stored determination result (whether or not the time-saving state termination condition is satisfied) at a timing at which it is determined whether or not to terminate the state, It is possible to appropriately manage the current game state and the type of special figure change executed during the short-time state.

  In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special symbol) determined at the timing when the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is started is determined, and the determination result is stored, so that Although it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the time-short state is terminated at the variation end timing, other configurations may be used. For example, when the variation (lottery) of the special figure is started, Even if control is performed to end the time reduction state based on the determination result at the special figure change end timing by determining whether or not the time reduction state ends at the timing when the change ends and storing the determination result. It is also possible to determine the type of special figure fluctuation executed this time (type of special figure fluctuation used for fluctuation) at the special figure fluctuation end timing, and perform control for ending the short-time state based on the judgment result. To run It may be.

<Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment>
In the control processing in the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89), and the time required to be executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) is different from the first embodiment. An end determination process (see FIG. 90) has been added, and the short-time fluctuation start process has been changed to a short-time fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 91), and the jackpot control process has been changed to jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 92). Is different.

  First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89) is different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above in that the special symbol variation lottery result is out, and the value of the hour and middle counter 203g is 1 or more. In this case (S224: Yes), the short-time end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is different, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the short time end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. This short time end determination process (see S251) executes control for determining the short state end state in the second embodiment having a plurality of short time end conditions.

  When the execution of the short time end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, it is first determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON, that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), at that time, the special symbol short-time termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, next, the value of the time-shortage counter 203g is set to “0” (S2303), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON in the process of S2301 (S2301: No), then the hour / middle counter 203g is decremented by 1 (see S2304), and this process ends.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the short time variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this short-time fluctuation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), whether the type of special figure fluctuation executed this time is special figure 1 or special figure 2 with respect to the short-time fluctuation start process of the first embodiment described above. Is added, and the other contents are the same. Description of the same contents is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the short-time fluctuation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processes of S501 and S502 as the short-time fluctuation start process are executed. When the processing of S502 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is special figure 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current variation is not special figure 2 (special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S503. And the process of S503-S512 same as a time-short fluctuation start process is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, every time the fluctuation of the special figure other than the special figure 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by one, When the time reduction state is ended when the value of the intermediate counter 203g becomes 0, and the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is executed, the value of the time reduction intermediate counter 203g is forcibly set to 0, and the time reduction state is changed. There are two short-time condition termination conditions for termination.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 a plurality of times during the time-shortening state, and the number of times of executing the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 during the time-shortening state is single (one time). Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) is different from the jackpot control process described above only in that the number of time reductions given to the jackpot after the end of the jackpot is changed from once to twice. However, the other contents are the same.

  About the same content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the same processes of S1801 to S1814 as the jackpot control start process described above are executed. If it is determined that the jackpot type is not “B or D” in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is set to “2”, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of short-time state termination conditions for terminating the short-time state are prepared, and further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation in the short-time state is represented by a plurality of variation patterns (variation). Time)). Thereby, the game in a time-short state can be diversified more and it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting a jackpot type to which a short-time state is given after the jackpot is fixed, a short variation pattern is continuously selected as a variation pattern (variation time) selected during the short-time state. In this case, although the time reduction state is given, it becomes a time reduction state in which it is substantially difficult to acquire the reserved memory of FIG. In this manner, the substantial time-short state entry ratio can be varied according to the selected result of the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special figure 1 variation.

  In the second embodiment, the time reduction state is set to 2 times as the time reduction state, and the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is executed twice or the time reduction state until the fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed once. However, the set number of time reductions and time reduction condition termination conditions are not limited as long as they can execute the same technical idea regardless of the configuration of the second embodiment described above. The number of time reductions may be set to 3 or more.

  Further, as the condition for time reduction, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 (for example, five times) more than the number of reserved storages (upper limit of 4) of special figure 1 or the fluctuation number of one time of special figure 2 may be set. Good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be reliably changed during the short-time state, so that if the player enters the short-time state, the player is a big hit A game can be provided.

  Furthermore, as the condition for time reduction, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is set to 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is set to 4 (or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 times), In addition, as the jackpot type executed when passing through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the jackpot type to which a short time is given and the jackpot type to which a short time is not given can be set as the jackpot type of the special figure 2 Another example may be used. By configuring in this way, when one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation executed at the first speed reduction, it is executed based on the special figure 2 fluctuation at the second speed reduction. The special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed during the small hit game to execute the big hit game or the specific area (V It is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to execute the third time reduction (second rotation in FIG. 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

  In other words, in the special figure 1 change (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation in the short time, when a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed and one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of FIG. 2, which is the priority fluctuation, is started at the second rotation in the short time. When the small win is won by the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the fluctuation of the second rotation in the short time. By passing the game ball through the specific area during the small hit game, a big hit game based on the small hit game (V winning big hit) is started. In this example, as the types of V winning jackpots in FIG. 2, it is possible to set a type to which a short-time state is given after a jackpot game and a type to which a short-time state is not given. If the jackpot based on the variation shown in FIG. 2 is a jackpot that does not give a short-time state, the jackpot game ends with this jackpot game. Here, in a state where only one reserved memory in FIG. 2 has been acquired, the player executes the jackpot game at the second rotation in the short time, or does not execute the jackpot game at the second rotation in the time reduction (small During the winning game, a special area (without passing the game ball to the V winning switch 650e3) is executed, and the special figure 1 change (second preparation period) executed for the third time reduction is executed. It is possible to select whether or not to execute a game for acquiring the reserved memory.

  Thus, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one of the reserved memories of special figure 2 is discarded to acquire more reserved memories of special figure 2 or acquired. Since it is possible to select whether or not the jackpot game based on the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 is to be executed reliably, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

  Furthermore, in this example, since the jackpot type executed based on the hold storage of FIG. 2 includes a type that gives a short-time state after the jackpot game ends and a type that is not given, FIG. When a jackpot game (V winning jackpot) based on the small hit game is executed in a state where there is one stored memory, there is a risk that the short-time state will end after the big hit game ends. Therefore, depending on which game content the player selects as described above, the subsequent game results can be greatly varied, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, you may be made to perform alerting | reporting means (for example, the effect display by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) which suggests the kind of jackpot game based on the jackpot game performed in the 2nd short rotation mentioned above. Thereby, the player can select the game content with reference to the notification content by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, the game content that is advantageous to the player may be notified in a notification mode that allows the player to grasp. For example, when the jackpot executed based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the hour is a jackpot to which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game ends, a notification mode for indicating that may be set. . Thus, the player can safely pass the ball to the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hit game of the second short rotation.

  In addition, in this another example, the time-short end condition is that the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4). Therefore, the game for selecting the game content described above can be executed only when the holding of the special figure 2 is acquired during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed in the first rotation of the time reduction. It is possible to play a game eagerly to acquire the reserved memory of FIG. 2 as soon as the state is given.

  In addition, since the short-time end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is smaller than the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2, for example, for the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the short-time state, for example. Thus, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 can be reduced. As a result, even when a plurality (for example, two) of reserved memory of special figure 2 are stored during one special figure 1 fluctuation, the second fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed during the short-time state. It is possible to increase the opportunities for selecting the above-described game contents. In this example, as the condition for time reduction, the number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of Special Figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 4 times). However, the short time end condition based on the number of fluctuations in FIG. 2 may be set so that the number of fluctuations is larger than the short time end condition based on the number of fluctuations in FIG.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. In the first embodiment described above, it is configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation) executed during the short time state, and the number of times of the normal symbol lottery executed during the short time state Was configured to stabilize. Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to vary the period during the time-shortening state, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-shortening state are provided, and further executed during the time-shortening state, compared to the first embodiment described above. It was configured to be able to set a plurality of fluctuation times in the special figure 1.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time reduction state can be set from a plurality of times, and the normal time that can be executed during the time reduction state according to the contents of the game. It was configured to vary the number of symbol lotteries.

  As a result, the player can be made to play the game eagerly in order to cause the player to execute lots of lottery of normal symbols during the short-running state and to acquire the special figure 2 hold. In addition, since the number of times of normal symbols to be executed during the short-time state can be varied, it is possible to set a time-short state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous time-short state, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and an MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the game in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured so that the short-time state given based on the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is different from the short-time state given based on the lottery shown in FIG. Furthermore, it is configured such that different time-short states are given even based on the gaming state when the time-short state is given. By assigning different time-short states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of time-short games, and it is possible to cause the player to execute a variety of games.

  Specifically, by setting different time-short states, the game time during the time-short state is made different by changing the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time-short state. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 wins the normal symbol during the special figure 1 fluctuation in the short-time state, wins the electric accessory 640a, and the second ball Since the game that acquires the special figure 2 hold is executed by entering the ball into the mouth 640, the normal symbol lottery times executed in a short time by changing the normal symbol change time ( The number of fluctuations can be varied.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is configured to be different based on the normal symbol lottery count (variation frequency) executed during the time-shortening state. Specifically, when the number of lotteries (variation count) of normal symbols executed during the short-time state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40), a variation pattern with a short variation time is set. ing. By configuring in this way, the number of normal symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) can be increased by executing a large number of normal symbol variations during the time-shortening state, and the time-shortening state is eager for the player. Middle games can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 per unit time can be increased. It is possible to provide a game advantageous to the above.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of short-time states with different normal symbol fluctuation times, it is possible to set advantageous time-short states and disadvantageous short-time states for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  First, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time-shortening state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a), differences from the first embodiment described above (differences from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)) will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, “39/40” is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the normal map change display area for displaying the number of changes in the normal map during the short-time state (during special map 1 fluctuation in the short-time state), and a value of “39” is executed. This is a general-purpose variation frequency display mode for indicating the number of times, and a value of “40” is a general-purpose target variation frequency display mode in which a normal symbol variation time is reduced. In the sub display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding the period until the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened is displayed.

  When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a) and the number of times of normal change in the short time state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the game state in which the normal time change time is shortened. A character “rushing to supercharge time” is displayed to indicate that the transition has been made, and a guidance display for guiding the player that the normal time has changed has been displayed in the sub display area Ds.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, a time reduction state selection table 202f is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The short-time state selection table 202f is a table that is referred to when selecting a short-time state based on the jackpot symbol (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) and the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. Reference is made in jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

  Here, in the third embodiment, as the gaming state to be set, the time reduction A and the time reduction B that is more advantageous to the player than the time reduction A can be selected. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the jackpot is won or the specific region (V winning) In the case of the timing when the ball passes through the switch 650e3), the time reduction A is selected as the time reduction state, and in other cases, the time reduction B is selected as the time reduction state as shown in FIG.

  In other words, when the game state is the normal state, a big hit is made based on the lottery in FIG. 1, and when the short time state is given after the big hit game is finished, the short time state is given as the short time state, otherwise the short time state. As a result, a short time B is given.

  When the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time reduction B is set, the normal symbol variation time is set as the time reduction. A shorter variation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) than when A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the villa mode for the first time, the normal symbol variation time is normal (4 seconds), the game is played during the short time state, and when entering the short time state again during the villa mode, The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the extended game mode advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the extended game mode to the normal game state.

  FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment is provided with a game state storage area 203s, a short time state storage area 203t, and a normal number counter 203u as compared with the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The gaming state storage area 203s is an area for storing the gaming state when the jackpot start is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of the short-time state given after the jackpot ends. The gaming state storage area 203s stores the gaming state (see S271 in FIG. 96) after the start of jackpot in the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 96), and the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99). ) Is determined as the jackpot end timing (S1811: Yes in FIG. 99), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814; No in FIG. 99), it is referred to when setting the time reduction state (S1871). ).

  The time-short state storage area 203t is an area for storing the selected time-short state type (time-short A, time-short B), and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-short state. The short time state storage area 203t stores the selected short time state (see S1871 in FIG. 99) when the short time state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), and the variable time setting (see FIG. 98). ), Reference is made to the information stored when setting the normal symbol variation time (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

  The normal figure number counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol during the time-short state, and every time the normal symbol is changed during the time-short state in the variation time setting process (see FIG. 98). 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the normal figure number counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the normal symbol variation time setting process is made different.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment except for the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 compared to the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation process is changed to the normal symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the process of S201 to S219 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the process of S219 is completed, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. Store (S271). Then, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the processes of S220 to S225 are executed, and this process is terminated.

  That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming state at the time when the jackpot start is set can be temporarily stored. Thereby, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the game state at the start of the jackpot (at the time of winning the jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the game state is stored in the game state storage area 203s at the timing when the special figure change time has elapsed and the jackpot start is set, but for example, the special figure change is started. It may be configured to store the gaming state of the timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed).

  Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processing of S901 to S912 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and then the variation time setting process is performed (S951). Here, the variation time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

  When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current time reduction state is the time reduction A (time reduction state A) (S2401), and it is determined that it is the time reduction A (time reduction state A). (S2401: Yes), the normal symbol variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the current time reduction state is not the time reduction A (time reduction state A) (S2401: No), then whether the value of the normal number counter 203u is greater than “1”? Is discriminated (S2402).

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal number counter 203u is not larger than “1” (S2402: No), “1” is set to the value of the normal figure counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Move on to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal number counter 203u is larger than “1” (S2402: Yes), the process proceeds to S2404.

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal number counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is not equal to or greater than “40” (less than 40), the normal symbol change time (normal figure change time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a variation time shorter than the normal map variation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is equal to or greater than “40”, the normal symbol change time (normal figure change time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a variation time shorter than the normal map variation time set in the process of S2405 is set. When the processing of S2405 or S2406 is completed, “1” is added to the value of the normal number counter 203u (S2407), the normal number command is set (S2408), and this processing is terminated.

  The normal number of times command set in the processing of S2408 is a command output to the sound lamp control device 113, and is output in the same manner as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. .

  As described above, in the third embodiment, different normal time fluctuation times are set based on the type of the short time state set and the number of normal time fluctuations executed during the short time state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of times of the normal map change executed during the time reduction state based on the type of the time reduction state and the number of times of the normal map change executed during the time reduction state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game that wins the usual figure and acquires the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

  In addition, when “short time B”, which is advantageous over “short time A” is set as the short time state (short fluctuation time is set as the normal time fluctuation time), the normal time fluctuation number is more than a predetermined number (40 times or more). ), The game time can be continuously executed during the time-short state because the player is configured to set a shorter ordinary fluctuation time.

  In the third embodiment, the specific normal time fluctuation time is set based on the short time state and the normal time number of times, but other configurations may be used. Corresponding to the number of figure fluctuations, there is provided a common figure fluctuation time selection table that is referred to in order to set a normal figure fluctuation time. Thus, it is also possible to select the normal map change time. In this case, a table that allows easy selection of a long normal variation time and a table that facilitates a selection of a short normal variation time should be provided in the short time state and the normal variation time selection table corresponding to the number of normal variations. Thus, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to vary the normal map change time that is easy to select based on the respective short time states (short time A, short time B) and the number of normal map changes, and the reserved memory of FIG. It is possible to improve the interest of the game to win.

  Further, in the third embodiment, two types of “time reduction A” and “time reduction B” are provided as types of time reduction states, but more types may be provided. In addition, one trigger (the number of times of normal map change is 40) is provided to change the time of normal map change selected based on the number of times of normal map change, but two or more may be provided.

  Furthermore, the third embodiment is configured such that when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal time fluctuation time shorter than normal is selected (easily made), but a specific upper limit condition (eg, normal When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50, or when the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit), a longer time than usual (for example, 10 seconds) ) May be selected. Thereby, it can suppress that a privilege is excessively provided with respect to a player by carrying out excessive usual figure change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). The jackpot control process 3 (S1704) differs from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above in that a process is added when it is determined that it is the timing of the jackpot end, and the other processes are the same Is executed. The description of the same processing is omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment. In the process of S1814, the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit D”. Is not (that is, the jackpot to which the time-saving state is given after the jackpot is ended) (S1814: No), the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving state selection table 202f, and the set time-saving state is set. Store in the time-short state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the hour / middle counter 203g is set to “1” (S1815), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed as in the command determination process of the first embodiment. If it is determined in S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal number of times command has been received (S3251). When the usual number of times command is received (S3251: Yes), the display usual number of times command is set (S3252). The display normal number of times command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and the normal pattern change executed during the short-time state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Variation 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the modification 1 of the game board 13 in each embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, in order to regulate the entry of a ball into the right first entrance 64 b disposed in the right region of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-electrical accessory 710 were provided. This reliably prevented the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b as long as the non-electric accessory 710 is not open. On the other hand, in this modification 1, the structure which restricts the entrance to the right 1st entrance 64b is used, without using the storage apparatus 750 and the non-electrically-powered accessory 710. Specifically, the movable valve 1500 is always provided above the right first entrance 64b, thereby restricting the entry of a ball into the right first entrance 64b.

  Further, in the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are disposed in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second entrance is located below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal symbol (ordinary figure) executed based on By disposing 640, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 directly. On the other hand, in this modification, the through gate 67 is disposed in the first flow path 701 and the second entrance 640 is disposed in the second flow path 702. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent a sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entrance 640.

  The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the first modification and the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above is that the storage device 750, the non-electrically-powered accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are excluded. And the point where the arrangement position of the right first entrance 64b is changed and the arrangement position of the second entrance 640 are changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. Other configurations are the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the first modification, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream portion of the first flow path 701, and the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. Is movable to the open position (in the open state), the ball is configured to enter the right first entrance 64b.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Yes. Specifically, in a movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is repeatedly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 1.2 seconds.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling member in which the movable member 1500 is always provided is provided. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this sphere flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the movable member 1500 at all times (or drops onto the movable member at all times) matches the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always open. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first entrance 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or dropping on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is open is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is 1 second, the timing at which both match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about 4 balls enter the right first entrance 64b per minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a short-time game, a ball regularly enters the right first entrance 64b. It is possible to prevent a situation in which there is no suspension in FIG. In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first left entry in the game state is normal. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  More specifically, when a left-handed game is performed when the gaming state is the normal state, about 15 shots enter the left first entrance 64a out of the 250 shots launched. It is designed and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. In addition, it is designed so that approximately 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow about 20 balls to enter the left first entrance 64a in consideration of launching the prize ball to be paid out again when 250 balls are fired. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a normal state and a right-handed game is performed, about 9 shots are designed to enter the right first entrance 64b out of the 250 balls that have been fired. If a ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the right region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, about 250 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if it is considered that the prize ball to be paid out is fired again when 250 balls are fired. I can only do that. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which a ball fired by a right-handed game passes. A general entrance 63 may be provided, which is based on a design concept such that the game is not advantageous to the player. Thereby, in the right-handed game during the short-time state or the big hit state, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as a prize ball.

  Next, among the configurations arranged in the right region of the game board 13 in the first modification, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

  In the first modification, the through gate 67 is disposed in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second entry is made in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball port 640 is provided. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds can flow down toward the second entrance 640 without decreasing the flow down speed. Therefore, since the flow interval of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. In addition, when it is not noticed that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 reports that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23B), it is promptly performed. The ball can enter the second entrance 640.

  Also, different flow paths (first flow paths 701, 701) that are distributed by the sorting member 700 between the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol. When the sorting member 700 is broken so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the sorting function is disabled) because it is disposed in the second flow path 702), the second entrance port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one flow path distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, and a state in which a sphere flows down only in one flow path is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the modification 2 of the game board 13 in each embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, in order to regulate the entry of a ball into the right first entrance 64 b disposed in the right region of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-electrical accessory 710 were provided. This reliably prevented the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b as long as the non-electric accessory 710 is not open. On the other hand, in the second modification, a movable plate 1700 is always provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630, and the ball that has passed through the storage device 750 when the storage device 750 is released. Has a case of entering the specific general entrance 630 and a case of not entering.

  Specifically, the movable plate 1700 is constantly variable between a guiding position (protruding position) where the ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 and an opening position (retracting position) where guiding is impossible (difficult), every second. The variable control means is provided, and the flow of the sphere that has passed through the storage device 750 can be controlled by the variable control by the variable control means.

  The constantly movable plate 1700 is controlled in operation by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) that variably operates the movable plate 1700 at all times is in an on state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is always protruded) and an off state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is always retracted). Variable control means for making the variable variable, and a variable scenario determined in advance based on a predetermined counter value updated each time the main process of the main controller 110 is executed by the variable control means The variable control along the line is executed.

  Note that the movable plate solenoid used in this modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always in the retracted position while being energized. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, this is the first condition during the short-time state as the end condition of the game period (the short-time state period in which the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is easily acquired) that is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition that the variation (lottery) of the special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed once is set. In other words, unless this end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol (normal diagram) fluctuation time is shorter than the normal state (normal diagram fluctuation time 3 seconds), and further, when the normal symbol (normal diagram) wins a win This is because the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is continuously executed as an opening operation pattern advantageous to the player (long opening). As described above, each special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) starts to be changed until the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired in the state where the special memory of the special figure 1 is not present. No (short waiting state), only the change of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is executed. In this case, the time-saving state is continued until the ball enters the second entrance 640 after winning the normal game. In order to suppress intentional creation of such a situation, when the movable valve solenoid is powered off, the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the protruding position. Thereby, even if the act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of great damage.

  In the configuration of the present modification described above, the right first entrance 64b is determined by the timing at which the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing at which the big hit game is started) and the variable state of the movable plate 1700 at all times. Can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot game to start at what timing.

  You may add the structure which can set a different timing as a timing which makes the storage apparatus 750 a cancellation | release state to this modification mentioned above. Specifically, in accordance with the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot of the special symbol (special chart), a jackpot type that releases the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and a jackpot type that is not released are set in advance. Further, as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, the first timing (for example, the timing for starting the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing for starting the third round) are set in advance. Configure.

  By comprising in this way, the timing which the storage apparatus 750 is cancelled | released and a ball | bowl passes the storage apparatus 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the timing at which the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the movable plate 1700 is always advantageous to the player, and even after the jackpot game is started, the player The game can be played with expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting the jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

  In addition, you may use for each embodiment mentioned above the structure which sets the presence or absence of cancellation | release of the storage apparatus 750 mentioned above, and several release timings according to jackpot classification. Thereby, more complicated game play can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the modification 3 of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. The third modification is different in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are different from those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. The configuration is the same. About the same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the third modification, the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are disposed on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. By configuring in this way, the right-handed game makes it easier for the storage device 750 to store the ball than the left-handed game. Specifically, the balls that have flowed down on the first variable winning device 65 among the balls launched by the right-handed game are configured to be most easily stored in the storage device 750.

  And in the state where the ball | bowl is stored in the storage apparatus 750, it is comprised so that the following sphere may flow down the stored sphere. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the flow direction extension line of the sphere flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 is A storage device 750 is provided (with a descending step with respect to the upper surface of the unit provided). Therefore, the subsequent sphere flow is not affected by the sphere being stored in the storage device 750. In the third modified example configured as described above, when the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, it is possible to ensure the holding of FIG. 1 more reliably.

  Each modification of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each embodiment described above. Thereby, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modified example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each embodiment described above will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the game board in which the second entrance 640 is disposed so that two or more balls do not enter the second entrance 640 while the electric accessory 640a is opening. It was comprised so that the ball | bowl flow of 13 right area | regions might be controlled. In other words, a measure for restricting the flow of the balls so that a plurality of balls do not flow continuously at the same time was applied to the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in this modification is configured such that two or more balls cannot enter the second entrance 640.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter part A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the pivot shaft parts 223 and 223 curved in a substantially “<” shape, and the pivot door A220 opens the side start winning opening A40A. It is composed of a door main wall A222A that is positioned on the front side and stands substantially vertically in the closed state, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B that extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section to prevent the game ball from being caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is located away from the pivot shafts 223 and 223, and pivots forward from a substantially horizontal state as the pivot door A220 pivots from the open state to the closed state. It will be in the state where it stood substantially vertically. The prize winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the back side of the side start winning prize opening A40A in a state in which the rotary door A220 is opened.

  Further, the width of the shutter part A222 is slightly narrower than the lateral width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the lateral width of the side start winning opening A40A. In the state in which the revolving door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall comes into contact with the side edge of the side start winning opening A40A, and the revolving door A220 further closes the side start winning end A40A. Prevents turning.

  Of the pair of side walls, door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 are respectively provided on the opposite side of the rotation shaft portion from the shutter portion. In addition, positioning contact portions A225 and A225 are formed on the side wall so as to be located behind the door rotation protrusion A224 and protrude downward when the rotation door A220 is in the fully open open end position. ing.

  A detection sensor is accommodated in the switch accommodating portion 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is vertically formed through the rear end portion thereof. Through holes are formed on both upper and lower surfaces of the switch housing portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage hole, and the game ball that has entered the tongue piece housing portion 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 and is accommodated in the switch. It moves below the part 215B. Note that a duct (not shown) is provided below the switch housing portion 215B for taking in the game ball and guiding it to the ball circulation system in the game hall.

  The tongue portion accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing is accommodated in the movable tongue piece A230. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the lateral width direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction and is thin in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue piece housing portion 215A.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and a front and rear end portion thereof is provided with a protruding and projecting piece portion that is stepped and narrower than the whole. The protruding and projecting projecting piece portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is wide enough to be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning opening A40A.

  A pair of outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S that are inclined downward toward both sides are formed on both sides in the lateral width direction of the upper surface of the protruding and projecting piece. Further, between the pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S and 240S in the protruding and projecting projecting portion, a retracted inclined surface that inclines extremely gently so as to descend toward the center and gently inclines toward the rear. 240H is formed. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the protruding and projecting projecting portion, a guide inclined surface 240Y that is relatively steeply lowered from the rear end of the retracted inclined surface 240H to the rear is formed.

  When viewed from above, the movable tongue piece A230 has a shape in which the rear side portion of the protruding and protruding protrusion portion protrudes rearwardly from the center in the width direction at the rear end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion. Yes. In the center in the width direction of the base portion, a ball passage long hole is formed vertically extending from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage long hole has a width slightly smaller than the width of the protruding and projecting piece portion so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. In addition, the front end of the ball passage long hole is semicircular and part of it reaches the base end of the protruding and projecting piece, and the rear end of the ball passage long hole is parallel to the bottom of the trapezoidal protrusion 231D. The position near the rear end of the base is reached.

  A pair of doors extending in the vertical direction along both side edges of the ball passage long hole in the range extending from the base end portion of the protruding and protruding protrusion portion to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230. A drive protrusion wall is formed to protrude. The entire rear portion of the base portion from the door driving protrusion wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is thick in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the rear end portion of the door driving protrusion wall.

  A pair of connecting recesses are formed in the power receiving portion A230P on the opposite inner side surfaces facing each other with the ball passage long hole interposed therebetween. Each connection recess includes a substantially triangular interference avoidance recess that is narrowed at the lower end side, and an engagement groove that is recessed and formed in the back surface of the interference avoidance recess on the side away from the ball passage long hole and extends in the vertical direction. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A disposed on the front side of the engaging groove extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B disposed on the rear side of the engaging groove portion protrudes forward from an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and serves as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

  Each door drive protruding wall has an intermediate depression at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate depression is the front pressing protrusion A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate depression is the rear pressing according to the present invention. This is a protrusion A242. The rear side pressing projection A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front side pressing projection A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression is a horizontal flat intermediate depression 233N. And the rear surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is a closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front pressing projection A241 is a door stopper A241J according to the present invention, and is flat horizontally. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is an open pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, and this also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Note that the front surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K as the rear surface, and is gently inclined to the front side from the middle to extend to the rear ends of the outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S described above. .

  The lower end of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connecting recess in the movable tongue A230, and the door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotation door A220 are engaged with the door drive protrusion wall of the movable tongue A230, respectively. doing. Thereby, the movable tongue piece A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the rotary door A220 is driven by receiving power from the movable tongue piece A230.

  First, transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue A230 will be described. The connecting arms of the seesaw member A250 are received in the interference avoiding recesses of the connecting recesses of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connecting projections A255, A255 of the connecting arms are respectively received in the engaging grooves of the connecting recesses. Engaged.

  Here, when the solenoid is not excited, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower end connecting projections A255 and A255 are located at the lower end of the engagement groove. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the rear end position of the linearly movable range, and the protruding and projecting protrusion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state where the protruding and protruding protrusions are retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the front and rear protrusions are retracted to a position where they are completely covered with the side starting winning opening A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the retracted state.

  When the solenoid is excited from this state and the plunger is attracted backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates about the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward, The lower end connecting projections A255 and A255 press the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A forward while slidingly contacting the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed forward of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting / recessing projecting piece portion projects from the side start winning opening A40A to the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the “front end operating position” according to the present invention and stopped. Then, the protruding and projecting projecting portion 240 protrudes to the maximum extent from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

  When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped in the state where the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the plunger protrudes forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 rotates to the rear of the gaming machine around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position from the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting projections A255 and A255 are slidably brought into contact with the rear slidable contact surfaces 236B and 236B of the engaging groove and pushed backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is retracted to the rear of the gaming machine, and the protruding and retracting protruding piece portion retreats to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

  Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end portion of the connecting arm in the seesaw member A250 is rotated rearward, first, the upper edge portion E1 (the first edge portion) of the stopper recess provided in the lower end connecting projection portion A255. The rear end edge of the one plane M1 is in contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper. As the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting projection A255 comes into sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower end connecting projection A255 is positioned behind the rotation shafts A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. Sometimes, the lower edge portion E2 of the stopper recess (the lower end edge of the second plane M2) is in contact with the lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B from the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding portion of the engagement groove portion. The contact surfaces 236B and 236B are pushed backward. Thereby, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

  By the way, when an illegal act of pulling the movable tongue piece A230 retracted in the back of the side start winning opening A40A to the front surface of the game board with, for example, a wire inserted from the gap of the gaming machine, become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engaging groove 236. Then, the first flat surface M1 in each stopper recess of the lower end connecting projections A255 and A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion are in surface contact. If the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 perpendicular to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotation shaft portion. The direction is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, the direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 forward so that the protruding and projecting protruding portion protrudes in front of the side start winning prize opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular protrusion formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. Thereby, rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

  Next, transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotary door A220 will be described. The door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotation door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusion wall of the movable tongue piece, respectively, whereby the rotation door A220 is rotated by receiving power from the movable tongue piece A230. To do. Specifically, in the state where the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the rear end retracted position and the entire protruding and projecting piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning award port A40A, the door turning protrusion A224 is pushed forward. It arrange | positions above the stopper part A241J for doors in the protrusion 241 (state of FIG. 104). At this time, the rotation shaft portion of the rotation door A220 is located obliquely forward from the door rotation protrusion A224. At this time, the first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  When the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward from the rear end retracted position, as shown in the changes in FIGS. 104 to 107, the front pressing projection A241 moves forward, and the lower end portion of the door rotation projection A224 The front pressing projection A241 is not opposed to the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotation projection A224 is opposed to the intermediate depression flat surface 233N in the vertical direction. In the meantime, the rotation space of the door rotation protrusion A224 is secured.

  When the movable tongue A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1. During this time, the movable tongue A230 moves forward, but the rotation door. Is maintained in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the protruding and projecting projecting portion of the movable tongue piece A230 projects a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end portion of the door rotation projecting portion A224 becomes the rear pressing projection portion A242. It contacts the front surface A242Z. When the movable tongue further advances, the door main wall A222A of the rotary door A220 is lifted, the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue A230 is at the front end. When the operating position is reached, the rotary door A220 is fully opened, and a game ball can be won in the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the turning door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotates by a certain angle, the turning door A220 is turned toward the open end position by its own weight. That is, the turning door A220 starts the turning operation when the protruding / projecting piece portion protrudes about half from the side start winning opening A40A until the protruding / projecting piece portion protrudes about half and then protrudes completely. During a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully open state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the front opening prize is obtained by a two-step operation in which the movable door A230 starts moving forward and the turning door A220 is stopped halfway and the turning door A220 starts to open halfway. Mouth A40A is opened. Then, when a game ball falls on the upper surface of the projecting / projecting protruding piece portion 240 protruding from the side starting winning opening A40A, the game ball is guided to the appearing / projecting projecting piece portion 240 to win the side starting winning entry port A40A and win. The game ball is detected by a detection switch.

  Further, in the state where the pivot door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear pressing projection A242, and the pivot door A220 is opened. Positioned. Thereby, rattling of the rotary door A220 is restricted. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 is retracted from the front end operating position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward as shown in the changes to FIGS. At this time, the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 moves relatively in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the protruding and protruding protrusion 240 on the movable tongue A230 moves into the front opening winning opening A40A (from the state in which the door rotation protrusion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing portion A242Z to the closing pressing portion A241K). The rotating door A220 is maintained in an open state during the movement in the second space AS2 until it comes into contact. Then, the movable tongue piece A230 has a front open prize for a predetermined amount (a distance to move in the second space AS2 from the state where the door rotation protrusion A224 contacts the opening pressing portion A242Z until it contacts the closing pressing portion A241K). When moved into the opening A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing projection A241 comes into contact with the lower end portion of the door turning projection A224. At this time, about half of the protrusion / projection piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is accommodated in the side start winning opening A40A. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted, the movable door piece A230 is operated so as to close as the movable tongue piece A230 is retracted. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted at the back side of the side start winning opening A40A so that the lower end portion of the door turning projection A224 is vertically moved with the door stopper portion A241J. Return to the initial state of facing in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the front opening prize is obtained by a two-step operation in which the movable door piece A230 starts moving backward and stops until the middle, and the pivot door A220 begins to close halfway. Mouth A40A is closed.

  By the way, in the state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (the state shown in FIG. 104), for example, when the turning door A220 is to be pry open with a wire or the like, the door turning protrusion A224 is turned to the opening side. The front-side pressing protrusion A241 contacts the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction. As a result, unauthorized opening of the pivot door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction in which the door turning projection A224 pushes the door stopper A241J of the front pressing projection A241 is in the vertical direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-rear direction) of the movable tongue A230. Therefore, when an improper external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper A241J of the movable tongue A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and the unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is surely prevented. Can do.

<Other production example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, description will be given of other effects performed using the configuration of each embodiment described above. In the second embodiment described above, as a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15A, each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, It was configured to display the number of holds for each symbol. On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect of displaying the symbol display of special figure 1 and the number of holds in the sub display area Ds is executed. In this sub-display area Ds, a special display mode (for example, a number) is displayed in a variable display mode corresponding to the fact that the design of Special Fig. 1 is changing (the special Fig. 1 change is being executed). The number of holds in FIG. 1 is configured to be displayed in a suggestion display mode that suggests a display mode to be displayed next in a variable display mode. Here, with reference to FIG. 108 (a), the content of this production example is demonstrated.

  The display screen of FIG. 108 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the case where there is no special figure 1 hold during the special figure 1 change during the time-shortening state (first time-shortening). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special display 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds is referred to as “remaining time seconds” as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable status of the variable display mode. A display of “10” is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the display and special figure 1 are changing. By changing the display mode (“10” in FIG. 108A) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. Yes.

  In addition, the display mode (for example, “10”) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is fluctuating indicates that the player mistakes that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is changed to the next display mode after a temporary stop display is performed for a period in which the player can recognize the display mode (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a slightly shaken state. The display mode (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b))) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped is the display mode of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, the apparatus is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 second) described above.

  By comprising in this way, the player can grasp | ascertain easily the content of the display mode displayed on the variable display area Ds4. Note that other configurations may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. For example, the period during which the special figure 1 is variably displayed In the period during which special figure 1 is stopped and displayed, the background image color of special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is changed, the display content of the auxiliary display form is changed, and the display form displayed in variable display area Ds4 You may change the color and the thickness of the letters. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 in an easily understandable manner.

  Further, according to the configuration used in this production example, it is configured such that the special figure 1 is fluctuating depending on the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 and the fluctuation remaining period of the special figure 1 can be notified. ing. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

  In this effect example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, an effect display that counts down the time in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3 is executed. For example, a story development type effect display such as an effect of answering a question as an answer and an effect of achieving a mission may be used. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing by changing the contents displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3.

  In the special display 1 hold display area Ds5 of the sub display area Ds, a hold number suggesting mode for indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (FIG. 108 ( a)). This reserved number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode that suggests a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 after the next time. In other words, the display mode displayed corresponding to each number-of-holds suggestion mode is also changed every time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, and any one of “V”, “9”, and “∞” is displayed. Is displayed. The display mode displayed as the number-of-holds suggestion mode suggests the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the “V” display mode is based on the lottery result of FIG. It is suggested that the “9” display mode indicates the remaining variation period of FIG. 1, and the “∞” display mode indicates that there is no reserved memory of FIG.

  According to the gaming state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no reserved memory in FIG. 1, the display setting of “∞” is set to increase as the number-of-holding indication mode. In this way, the display mode of each pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 includes the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed, the remaining change time of the special figure 1 being changed, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of held balls of 1, the player can play a game while predicting the progress of future games based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four pending number suggesting modes are displayed, but this number is always displayed as four pending number suggesting modes regardless of the reserved number in FIG. It is configured to be. In other words, the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to notify (suggest) the number of holds in the special figure 1 to the player according to the display contents of each hold number suggesting mode, not the display number of the hold number suggesting mode. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to predict the current number of holds.

  In addition, in this production example, although the number of displays of the number-of-holds suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to always display four (regardless of the number of holds in the special figure 1), Other configurations may be used, for example, displayed in the special figure 1 holding display area Ds5 based on the number of holdings of special figure 1, the remaining variation time of special figure 1, and the lottery result of special figure 1. You may vary the display number of the hold number suggestion mode. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shortened (for example, when the remaining time is 10 seconds), the display number of the reserved number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is decreased. Configure. As a result, the options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine configured to execute a game advantageous to the player when there is no reserved number of the special figure 1 at the time when the time reduction state ends as in the second embodiment described above, By informing (displaying) the presence / absence of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 as in this production example, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game in a short time state while expecting the player to the end.

  Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) has passed and the fluctuation of special figure 1 has stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example of the case in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 has a hold in the state where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time reduction state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time reduction is completed with no special figure 1 or special figure 2 on hold, the special symbol does not start to change (the special figure fluctuation at the second reduction in time is not changed). Without being started). During the short waiting time at this time, by continuously executing the right-handed game, the game in which the normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery) and the ball enters the second entrance 640 is executed.

  In the configuration of the gaming board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is executed during the short-time state, a ball does not enter the right first entrance 64b. The state shown in FIG. 5 is a gaming state in which the time-saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entrance 640. On the display screen, the main figure main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, instead of displaying the number of holds in the special figure 1, Is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 does not fluctuate in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3. The characters “remaining time ∞ seconds” in which the “∞” display mode is stopped are displayed.

  As described above, according to the production example described above, the display mode in which the fluctuation status (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 during the short-running state and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 are displayed on the display screen is displayed. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the above-described effect example shifts to a short standby state that can occur in the state where both FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not held (the “∞” display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). The effect display for suggesting is also executed, but the determination as to whether or not to execute this effect display is made based on the number of reserved memories (whether there is a hold) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the number of reserved storage in FIG. 2 is 1 or more, it is preferable not to execute the effect display described above.

  In the first embodiment described above, when both the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol variation (lottery) is executed and the gaming state at the timing for setting the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a are both in the short-time state, Although it was configured to set an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, other configurations may be used, for example, normal symbol variation (lottery) is executed The timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing at which the determination means performs the determination.

  Also, not the timing for setting the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (timing for setting the operation mode by the operation mode setting means), but the timing for executing the operation of the electric accessory 640a (timing for the operation means to execute the operation). ) May be used.

  Furthermore, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a causes the electric accessory 640a to be operated a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing at which each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. . Specifically, as an operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, there is an operation pattern that opens the electric accessory 640a three times, and when the operation pattern advantageous to the player (long open) is set, each release When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern disadvantageous to the player (short opening) is set, when each opening period is set to 0.2 seconds, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is long open Is set, and the short-time state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. By configuring in this way, the player can be operated after the game state has shifted to the normal state while the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player until the end during the short-time state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to easily prevent the excessively advantageous state from being provided.

  In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the release period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. You may comprise so that the timing and operation | movement content of operation | movement of the electrically-driven accessory 640a may be controlled separately for every operation | movement, without setting the operation | movement pattern of the thing 640a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 in a state where the electric accessory 640a is open, a sphere is placed in the second entrance 640. It is possible to enter the second entrance 640 in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. A distribution means for alternately distributing spheres between the first flow path and the second flow path (second flow path) incapable of entering the second entrance 640; The interval between the spheres flowing down is widened. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time.

  For example, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640 among the passages (first passage) that can enter the second entrance 640, even if the first flow Even if a plurality of spheres flow down continuously on the road, the sprocket mechanism may guide the spheres one by one to the downstream side, so that the space between the spheres may be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time. As described above, when the ball feeding member that sends the balls in the downstream direction is provided upstream of the second entrance 640 so that the flow interval of the balls is constant, the above-described sorting member may not be used. . Further, the ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the above-described sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body that can be moved by a certain operation is provided, and the sphere is fed (flowed down) at a predetermined timing in the downflow direction depending on the moving position of the magnetic body. ) Configuration may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which a ball launched in a right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths by a distribution member (distribution device 700). However, a configuration in which the balls are distributed to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, a configuration in which one allocating member distributes the spheres to three or more flow paths may be used, or a combination of a plurality of allocating members may be used to convert the spheres to three or more flow paths. You may comprise so that it may distribute. Thereby, the space | interval which a ball | bowl flows down the flow path which can enter into the 2nd entrance 640 can be expanded more.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a distribution member (distribution device 700) that distributes spheres equally to a plurality of flow paths is used, but it is necessary to equalize the distribution ratio of the spheres to each flow path. For example, a sorting member may be provided such that the number of spheres flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 are one to two. You may provide the structure which is selected at random. Thereby, the player can be interested in the flow-down mode of the ball.

  In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for ending the time reduction state are provided, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the configuration for ending the time reduction state is used. However, other configurations may be used in advance. The time-short state may end when all the set conditions for the time-short state are satisfied. In this case, it is good to use the structure which outputs outside so that a player can grasp | ascertain already what satisfy | fills conditions among several time-short state completion conditions.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, one of the conditions for ending the short-time state is that the first special symbol change (lottery) is executed a plurality of times (twice) as the short-time number for which the short-time state is continued. However, the following gaming properties may be executed using such a configuration.

  In the third embodiment described above, when the time-short state B is set for the purpose of providing a variety of playability by changing the variation time of the normal symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, When the number of times of normal symbol changes exceeds 40 times, the normal symbol change time is shortened to provide an advantageous state for the player, but the normal symbol change time is made different. Thus, it may be configured to provide an unfavorable state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal time fluctuations based on the type of symbol won in the win and the game state at the time of winning in the win In the configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection table, and the normal map change time to be executed is selected from the selected normal map change time selection table, the change time of the first special symbol in the short time state Also IHiroshizu varying time (Hiroshizu length variation time) may be used can become configuration selection.

  In this case, if the normal figure variation time is selected, no more normal symbol lottery can be executed during the short time state, so that the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially ended. By configuring in this way, the player knows how long a substantial time-short state (the game state is in the time-short state and the normal symbol variation time is not selected as a normal symbol variation) will continue. It is possible to provide a game that is difficult to do.

  In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (ordinary figure), a configuration may be used in which a fluctuation time preset in advance based on the number of fluctuations in the normal figure is selected. When setting the variation time of a symbol (common figure), a configuration may be used in which a variation time corresponding to a counter value acquired from a plurality of variation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Furthermore, when starting the change of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol), when the predetermined lottery is executed and the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is changing in the short time state. It is also possible to select a normal figure change time (normal figure length change time) longer than the change time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds).

  In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to end a substantial time-saving state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The game can be concentrated while always having a sense of tension.

  Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 executes the configuration in which the normal symbol variation time (ordinary symbol length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the short time state is selected. As an effect to be performed, it is preferable to turn off the right-handed game notification and guide the left-handed game even if the normal-length variation time is selected even if the time is short. In this case, since the special figure 1 variation in the short time state is still being executed, the short symbol state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the special figure 1 variation in the short time state is completed. It is good to execute the effect which notifies that (renzo mode) was completed. Thereby, it can be made to make a player think that the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation in time reduction state is complete | finished, and the time reduction state is complete | finished.

  In addition to the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation time (150 seconds), the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (3 seconds) but longer than the normal usual figure fluctuation time (3 seconds) (for example, (30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be settable. In this case, when the normal time variation time is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect display that makes it seem that the short-time state has ended, as in the case where the normal time variation time is set. Display the time when the fluctuation time in the normal map ends, or immediately before the fluctuation time in the normal time ends (for example, corresponding to the normal variable fluctuation time) It is advisable to display the effect display during the time-saving state again 3 seconds before. Thereby, it can be made to think that it shifted to the time-short state several times using one time-short state, and a game with an unexpectedness can be provided to a player.

  Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two common map variation configurations, a short time state end effect that is executed when the set normal diagram variation time exceeds the remaining time of the short time state, and the set general diagram variation time May be configured to display both the time-short state end suggestion effect executed when the time is shorter than the remaining time of the time-short state. Thereby, even after the short-time state end effect is executed, it is possible to play the game eagerly with the expectation to immediately shift to the short-time state.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the sphere cannot enter the second entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time-short state). When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a game stop means for stopping the game may be provided. In this case, as the game stop means, a means for executing a launch prohibition process in which a ball is not fired even when the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is a game area (of the game board 13). The ball collection process to be collected before reaching the front), the firing control process to regulate the firing strength of the operation handle to the firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (launch strength that cannot reach the game area) Even if a ball enters each entrance provided in the game area, a ball entry invalidation process that invalidates all the benefits (privilege payout privilege, privilege to execute a lottery), and the like can be considered.

  Further, as a process for executing the game stop means, first, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a short-time state. If it is determined that the time-short state is not established, it is next determined whether or not the current game is a big hit game. When it is determined that the game is not a big hit game, it may be determined that the current entry is an illegal entry and the game stop process by the game stop means described above is executed.

  Further, in the above-described game stop means execution process, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the big hit game, the game stop means is not executed, but a special privilege effect is executed. Good. In other words, during the big hit game, it is not in the short-time state, but since it is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed, a ball may enter the second entrance 640 rarely. In this case, the game stop means is not executed, and instead, a dedicated effect for congratulating the player is executed, which makes it possible to feel that the player has had a very rare experience. It is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the dedicated effect described above, the normal symbol variation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner that the player can recognize during the jackpot game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The opening timing (short opening timing) may be predicted. Thereby, the player can digest the jackpot game while paying attention to the general-purpose fluctuation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other production example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, the other effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In this production example, the configuration for setting the variation time of the normal symbol is different from that of the above-described third embodiment, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set according to the gaming state. The setting is made based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the content of the effect performed in this effect example 2 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 109 shows an example of an effect display screen executed in the effect example 2, and FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time reduction state is started. 109 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as the variation time of the normal symbol during the time-short state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), a picture imitating a bomb is displayed on the display screen of the present production example 2 as an end suggestion display mode Dm10 that is an opportunity to reduce the remaining period of time. In the second sub-display area Ds2, characters “pinch when the bomb explodes” are displayed, indicating the content of the end suggestion display mode Dm10.

  When the variation time longer than the remaining period of time is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in an exploded display mode, In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, characters “sorry end” are displayed and the remaining time is displayed in “? Seconds”.

  In this way, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (ordinary figure) does not end during the short time period, although the actual short time period (the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in which the fluctuation has started during the short time period) does not change. In this case, since the electric accessory 640a does not perform an opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player during the short time period, the state advantageous to the player is substantially ended.

  Note that this production example 2 is configured such that the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is displayed when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of time. However, if the variation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal variation time (3 seconds) can be set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and if the variation time is selected, the same display screen is displayed. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the universal variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the common map variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa includes a normal usual figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and a case where the gaming state is the short time A. A reference time variation map selection table 202aa2 for reference time reduction and a reference variation pattern selection table 202aa3 for time reduction B referred to when the gaming state is time reduction B are defined, and differ depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referred to.

  The normal map variation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a variation pattern (variation time) of 4 seconds is always selected as shown in FIG. 110 (b). As shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d), the change pattern selection table 202aa3 for 202aa2 and the short time B, respectively, changes the value of the fluctuation type counter and the normal symbol (ordinary figure) during the short time state. Based on the number of times, a variation pattern (variation time) is selected.

  Note that the means for measuring the number of times of changing the normal symbol (ordinary figure) during the short-time state is the same as that in the third embodiment described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. This normal symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-described normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process (S914, S915) for setting the variation time is changed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is completed, the variation time is set based on the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, this process ends.

  As described above, according to the present production example 2, the period that is advantageous to the player during the short-term period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is opened long) can be varied depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player aware of how long the advantageous period lasts.

  It should be noted that, based on the universal symbol winning information command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol stored in advance is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no usual fluctuation in the fluctuation time that exceeds the short time remaining period in the ordinary determination information in the ordinary figure. Thereby, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Moreover, you may change an effect display aspect according to the presence or absence of the pending | holding memory | storage of special figure 2. FIG. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only in a state where there is no reserved memory in FIG. Thereby, the game which made the player have a sense of crisis can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when winning a big win (per symbol) in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and when a ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( Although the example using the pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the jackpot game is executed has been described for each V prize), the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is only applied to the above-described symbols. It may be used for a gaming machine (so-called one type). Next, a gaming machine when the configuration of each embodiment described above is used for one type will be described.

  The game machines used in other examples are executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery, and a predetermined condition is established depending on the type of the winning jackpot A game machine capable of giving a probability variation state in which the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery is set higher than the normal state until the special symbol is changed five times (so-called 1 Bonus winnings based on the 2nd special symbol (bonus game with a large number of rounds and jackpots that are likely to be given a promising state). (Game) is easily given.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol as in the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. And in the state which has both the holding memory of the 1st special symbol and the holding memory of the 2nd special symbol, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation (lottery) based on the holding memory of the 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. (So-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game in which a reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired in a state where the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a game during a predetermined period (during the first special symbol variation in the probability variation state). In addition, when using such a structure, the 1st entrance means which becomes an opportunity to acquire the reserve memory of a 1st special symbol by performing the game (for example, right-handed game) aiming at the predetermined location of a game area | region. (1st entrance 64) and each 2nd entrance means (2nd entrance 640) used as an opportunity to acquire reservation memory of the 2nd special symbol so that each entrance is possible. Means may be provided. Further, it is preferable that the second entrance means is more difficult to enter the ball than the first entrance means.

  Thereby, in the probability variation state, a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period (a period until the number of variations of the special symbol ends five times) during which the probability variation state continues, A game in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed without the lottery of the second special symbol being executed (the ball does not enter the second pitching means) (unfavorable game) or the first special A variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the symbol, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (a period until the number of variations of the special symbol ends five times). (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and a game in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed (advantageous game) is executed.

  Thus, since the probability variation state advantageous to the player and the unfavorable probability variation state are executed by the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probability variation state, the variation of the special symbol performed during the probability variation state. The player can be watched. Further, as in the above-described embodiments, even when a small win is won in the first special symbol, the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be continued.

  In addition, in the other examples described above, as a type 1 probability variation type game machine, the probability variation state has been used when the special symbol variation count reaches a predetermined number of times, but other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration that keeps the probability variation state until the next jackpot is won or a lottery to determine whether or not to end the probability variation state every time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, based on the lottery result A configuration for terminating the probability variation state may be used.

  Moreover, in the other example mentioned above, the fluctuation | variation (lottery) based on the holding | maintenance memory | storage of FIG. 2 is used preferentially over the fluctuation | variation (lottery) based on the holding | maintenance memory | storage of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which special symbol changes (lottery) are executed in the order in which reserved memory is acquired (winning order) regardless of the special figures 1 and 2. Further, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number) to which the probability variation state is given may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number is reached, the probability variation state may not be given after the big hit.

  Next, in the first embodiment described above, by acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) executed during the time-shortening state, Although the configuration in which the time saving state is given again after the jackpot game based on the reserved memory is used, an upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set for the number of times the time saving state is continuously given. .

  In this case, the number of jackpots executed before the maximum number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit, depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved storages in Fig. 2). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to acquire more reserved memory numbers as shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment described above, a time reduction state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is provided. You may comprise so that the jackpot type to which a time-short state is not provided after completion | finish may also be selected. Thereby, by continuously digesting the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times that the time-short state is given when the jackpot is continuously executed.

  That is, for example, in the case where there are four reserved memories in FIG. 2 and the jackpot game based on the reserved memory is continuous for four times, the time is shortened when the four reserved memories in FIG. 2 are consumed. While the next special symbol variation is executed in the state where the number of consecutive grants of the state is 4, the large hit game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is based on the reserved memory that is digested last. If the jackpot is short and the others are short, the number of consecutive grants in the short time state is one when the four reserved memories in FIG.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of continuous grants in the short-time state has reached the upper limit, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the maximum number of jackpots can be varied when the number of consecutive grants in the short-time state reaches the upper limit according to the jackpot type of the reserved memory acquired in FIG. 2, the game that is surprising to the player is provided. be able to.

  In addition, as a method of measuring the number of times of continuous giving in the time-short state, a method of measuring the number of times that the time-short is set for a continuous jackpot may be used, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time-short state is measured It is also possible to do it. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, a maximum of 25 jackpots (special characteristics) can be obtained when the number of consecutive grants in the short-time state reaches the upper limit (5 times) in one consecutive resort mode. 2 is the upper limit (4) each time, and the fluctuation result of Special Figure 1 is a big hit every time), and a minimum of five big hits (Special Figure 2 has a reserved memory number of 1 every time, 1 is provided). In this way, when the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive grants in the short-time state, the number of jackpots executed during one extended game mode can be varied. The game can be performed eagerly.

  Also, in a right-handed state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a short-time state or a probable change state), among the special symbols, an advantageous special symbol that is advantageous to the player (second special symbol) and a disadvantage than the advantageous special symbol The special symbol (the first special symbol) becomes variable (lottery), and during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is configured so that the variable execution condition is more easily established than the first special symbol. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing by the determining means for determining the type of the special symbol that is changed during the right-handed game, the display means (the third symbol display device 81) 2 When the effect display for variably displaying the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed and the discrimination means determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is indicated. Of identification information for Rather than showing, a guidance display (for example, “save hold of special figure 2”) that prompts the user to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation period. You may comprise as follows.

  Thus, in a specific gaming state, based on the type of special symbol to be executed, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (particularly, the special symbol variation display mode) is changed to be currently set. An appropriate game method can be notified to the player based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, there is provided discrimination means for discriminating the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game, and the variation time of the first special symbol being executed by the discrimination means is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It may be configured such that the guidance display described above is displayed when it is determined as described above. Thereby, the player can grasp the content of the guidance display, and the game content of the game being executed can be corrected. In addition, it is possible to suppress the period during which the guidance display is displayed from being shortened and confusing the player.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the short-time state, the opening pattern of 11 seconds in total, that is, the first opening period 3 seconds, the closing period 5 seconds, and the second opening period 3 seconds (long opening) ) And the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern is completed, or when one ball enters the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Although it is configured so that a condition (end condition) for ending the opening operation of the object 640a is satisfied, different opening patterns and ending conditions are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and each of the above-described embodiments May constitute gaming machines having different gaming characteristics.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 is reduced when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time-shortening state (when winning in the normal symbol lottery during the time-shortening state). By restricting the number to one, the player is prevented from being given excessive benefits. However, by using such a configuration, a privilege that is given to the player when winning in the normal symbol lottery during the short-time state (a privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric actor 640a executed during the short-time state, an interval at which the balls reach the electric actor 640a (the balls are separated by the sorting member 700). The release scenario is set as an end condition of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a by setting an opening pattern in which an opening scenario in which 0.2 seconds are opened five times at intervals of 1.2 seconds, which is a distribution interval), is used. In such a case, a configuration may be used in which the end condition is set when four balls have entered the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

  With this configuration, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the long release pattern coincides with the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the electric agent 640a is released once. In this case, a maximum of four balls can be made to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the short-running state, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the privilege given to the player (the privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) to enter the gaming situation (ball launch timing, The timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a) can be varied, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when a game that launches 100 balls in one minute is executed), the opening interval of the electric game 640a is set to the ball of the electric game 640a. Since it is set to 1.2 seconds in the same manner as when the player reaches, it is easy for a player who is actively executing a right-handed game to enter a large number of balls into the second entrance 640. can do.

  Further, as described using the first embodiment described above, in the right region of the game board 13, the distribution member 700 that distributes the game balls alternately, and the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 flow down. Since the ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying means (a curved path 701a or a straight path that does not decrease the flow speed of the ball) for making the interval constant, When the ball is continuously executed, the accuracy of the interval at which the fired sphere reaches the electric accessory 640a can be further increased.

  In addition, when such a structure is used, you may comprise so that the suggestion alert | report for instruct | indicating to a player the opening timing of the electrically-driven accessory 640a may be performed. By executing the suggestion notification, it is possible to cause the player to play a game at a timing at which the player can easily enter the ball into the second entrance 640.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is determined that the operation means has been operated when the player presses down. Can be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, lever-type operation means that can be determined that it has been operated, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless type operating means capable of discriminating an operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. In addition, as a configuration of the display means, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used, and a display applying an organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound. The screen of the device (organic EL display) and various three-dimensional objects (such as an accessory) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and the position (protrusion, burial relationship) of the three-dimensional surface is identified, and then images are displayed using a projector. You may use the display apparatus (project mapping) to irradiate.

  In addition, when using the project mapping mentioned above as a display means, based on the data of the solid surface of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the position data of the movable accessory at the time of irradiation, irradiation of video data By configuring so as to determine the position and the contents, it is possible to execute a free display and enhance the effect. Also, in consideration of the case where an abnormality has occurred in a movable object that can be a screen, it is determined whether the movable state of the movable object is normal, and if it is determined that the determination result is not normal, the non-movable It is preferable to execute the abnormal control so that the image data is irradiated using the portion as a screen. Thereby, the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable accessory can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game that aims at the right region of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (short-time state) advantageous to the player, and the left region of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game is configured to be executed, but it is sufficient that the target area of the game board 13 is different depending on the gaming state. May execute a right-handed game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game in a different game state can be performed aiming at the same area | region.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (In 1 type and 2 types of configuration, it changes with special 1 fluctuation period)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result When the stop display is made, the first privilege granting means for giving the first privilege to the player, the second acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second acquisition means Based on the second information stored in the storage means, a storage means for storing the acquired second information and a second determination that is easier for the player to make a determination that is more advantageous than the first determination. 2 determination means and a state for restricting the establishment of the second acquisition condition In a gaming machine having a first state and a state setting means that can be set by switching between a first state and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more easily established than the first state, the storage means stores Priority means for preferentially executing the second determination corresponding to the second information being performed over the first determination, and when the first state is switched to the second state, The gaming machine A1 is configured such that the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether the start port provided on the gaming board is changed from the first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which a game ball is easy to enter Some perform a first lottery of no. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed by a game ball entering the start port in a state that is easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times until the predetermined lottery result is displayed. A gaming machine that is continuously set is proposed (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is moved early. There was a problem of getting bored.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed even in a special state in which the second acquisition condition is easily established, and the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period. Since the execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, it is a period in which the first determination that is disadvantageous to the player over the second determination is performed, and then the second determination that is advantageous to the player is performed. Since the second determination is prioritized by the priority unit with respect to the second information stored in the storage unit and executed by the priority unit, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is continuous. Thus, by switching to a period that is easy to execute, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first acquisition means that triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition by entering a game ball and the establishment of the second acquisition condition by entering the game ball A second entry means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the second entry means and a closed state in which entry is difficult, and the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area. Detection means capable of detecting whether or not, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball in the detection means, and lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. When the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result are stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state in a variable pattern set by a predetermined rule. Variable control means for varying, and the lottery means Gaming machine 1 identification information or the second identification information is characterized in that which is configured to be able to execute the lottery in the period being dynamically displayed A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, a lottery is performed by passing the game ball to the passing area even during a period in which a special state is set and the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Since the second acquisition condition can be satisfied by executing the game ball into the second ball entry means, the passage area is as much as possible even during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player play a game so as to pass the game ball.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a state in which a game ball can enter, a variable winning means in which the game ball can be made difficult to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass When the game ball passes through the specific area, the special game execution means for executing the special game advantageous to the player and the second determination means have determined that the specific second determination result is obtained. Based on this, the game machine A3 has variable game execution means for changing the variable entry means from the difficult entry state to the enterable state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game that allows a game ball to pass to a specific area, There is an effect that a game with change can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 and A3, the variable pattern that is varied by the variable control means is variably set corresponding to a period during which the special state is set. Game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed corresponding to the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that it is possible to execute the variable pattern according to the period in which the special state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means First dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information, the first dynamic display period setting means in the case where the second state is set by the state setting means As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means, and the lottery information A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a second dynamic display period longer than a dynamic display period to be dynamically displayed can be set.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the second state is set as the second state by the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means. An advantageous state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball in the second ball entry means can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game so that the second state becomes the advantageous state.

  The gaming machine A5 includes display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and display control means for displaying state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means on the display means. The control means does not display state information for indicating the second state when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A5, the gaming ball is entered into the second entry means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period that is difficult to be set is set, since the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, the player's expectation is impaired by the information displayed on the display means. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine has a game restricting means capable of restricting a player's game based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied while the first state is set. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is established in the first state where establishment of the second acquisition condition is regulated, Since the game can be restricted, there is an effect that the second acquisition condition can be prevented from being illegally established.

  In the gaming machine A7, the gaming regulation means regulates the launch of a gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, since the launch of the game ball is regulated by the game regulation means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means can have a first flow path in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means and a game ball to the second ball entry means. The first entrance means arranged in the second flow path is arranged in the second flow path, and the game ball enters the entrance opening arranged in the second flow path. The ball is made in a state where it can enter, and the game ball is made difficult to enter by entering the first entrance means arranged in the second flow path. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by entering the game ball into the entrance, and the game ball is entered into the second entry means. Even when the game ball is caused to flow down into the second flow path to cause the ball to enter, the game ball can easily enter the first entrance means by entering the game entrance into the first entrance means. There is an effect that the determination can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A9, holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the entrance, and holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on establishment of a release condition And a gaming machine A10, characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

  In the gaming machine A10, the release condition is released based on the fact that the first privilege is given by the first privilege giving means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, since the release condition is established at the timing when the first privilege is granted, the first acquisition condition is easily established after the first privilege is granted. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristics B group> (Regular special 1 prize regulation)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter The first ball entry means, the second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. An acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the ball, a determination unit for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit are dynamically In a gaming machine having dynamic display means to be displayed and privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is specific is stopped and displayed , By causing a game ball to flow down in the second flow path and executing the game, In a state setting means capable of setting a special state that is more advantageous to the player than running the game by flowing down the game ball, and the special state is not set by the state setting means, And a restricting means that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means when the game is played with the game ball flowing down in the second flow path. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether the start port provided on the gaming board is changed from the first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which a game ball is easy to enter Some perform a first lottery of no. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed by a game ball entering the start port in a state that is easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times until the predetermined lottery result is displayed. A gaming machine that is continuously set is proposed (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is moved early. There was a problem of getting bored. In addition, in order to give a change to the game, if it is configured to play the game by changing the flow route of the game ball, it is illegally beneficial to the player by flowing the game ball to a route different from the assumed flow route. There was a problem that was given.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the special state is set, the game can be changed by causing the second flow path to flow down to allow the game to be changed, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is restricted from entering the second entry means more easily than the first entry means. Therefore, when the special state is over, the first flow path is flowed down to play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as fraud by inevitably directing the player to make it happen.

  In the gaming machine B1, the second flow path is formed with at least a third flow path through which a game ball can flow down and a fourth flow path through which the game ball flowing down the third flow path is difficult to flow down. And a distribution means capable of distributing the game balls flowing down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second flow ball into the fourth flow path A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the means are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, among the gaming balls that have flowed down to the second flow path, the gaming balls distributed to the third flow path can enter the second pitching means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the amount of game balls that can be entered into the second entry means rather than the first entry means.

  In the gaming machine B2, the third flow path is provided with a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, Advantage determination means for executing an advantageous determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information acquired when the information is acquired by the acquisition means and a game ball enters the third ball entry means. And the variable control means for changing the third ball entry means from a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a state in which it is easy to enter, by setting the special state. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B2, in a special state, it is easy to enter the third entering means, so that the player can cause the gaming ball to flow down to the second flow path. There is an effect that the player can be prompted to play a game.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the distributing unit distributes the game balls alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, and the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, by alternately distributing, half of the gaming balls that have flowed down to the second flow path can be caused to flow down effectively. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, switching is made to a holding means capable of holding the game ball flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path, and a state in which the game ball held by the holding means flows down. A switching means, an opening through which the game ball that has flowed down by switching to the flow-down state can be entered by the switching means, and the game ball enters the opening, whereby the second entry A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the means has variable means for allowing a game ball to enter.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the holding means and the switching means regulate the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, so at an unintended timing. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second entrance means.

  In the gaming machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which a game ball can be held after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after switching to the flow-down state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define the period during which the gaming ball can enter the second entering means, so that the gaming ball enters the second entering means. There is an effect that can be regulated more.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is variable by the variable means so that the game ball is difficult to enter based on the game ball entering. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5 or B6, even when the switching means is switched to the state of sulfidation, the gaming ball has entered the second entry means. In this case, since the second entry means is changed to a state in which it is difficult for the game balls to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second entry means continuously. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a first position in which the game ball held by the holding means can be flowed down and the flowed game ball can be guided to the first flow path, and the first Variable guide means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide to the flow path, and guide member variable control that variably controls the variable guide means to the first position and the second position at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that the opening is disposed in an area where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow downstream, and the variable guiding means are in the first position. The game ball can be inserted into the opening only when the timing that is changed to the predetermined time satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the player can play the game with consciousness of the game timing. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. A gaming machine B9 having variable means for performing the above-described operation.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened, so that the identification information is dynamically displayed to the player. There is an effect that interest can be given to the period and the interest of the game can be improved. The longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can expect a longer dynamic display period.

<Characteristic C group> (Control for one game)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow, and a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter A first ball entry means arranged, a second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball in the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. An acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the player has entered, a determination unit that executes determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit are dynamically In a gaming machine having dynamic display means to be displayed and privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. 2 The first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the entry is more difficult than the first state Variable means for changing to a second state, variable execution means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a variable condition, and on the basis of establishment of a specific condition, A special state setting means for setting a special state that makes it easier to execute a privileged game that is advantageous to a player by causing the game ball to flow down to the second flow path from the first flow path, After the bonus game is executed, the identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the bonus game is executed, release means for releasing the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period, A gaming machine C1 having variable condition determination means for determining whether a variable condition is satisfied.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult for the player to check whether or not the lottery is actually drawn in a high probability state, and that the interest is easily lowered.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when a privilege game is executed, it is determined whether a variable condition for determining whether the variable means is changed to the first state is satisfied. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information is easily displayed dynamically, the special state is easily released, and if the variable means is not changed, the identification information cannot be displayed dynamically. The special state can be easily set continuously, and there is an effect that the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

  The gaming machine C1 has a type determining means for determining the type of the special game when the special game is executed, and the variable condition determining unit is configured to determine the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine C2 that determines whether the variable condition is satisfied based on the game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the privilege game to be executed. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game contents can be set.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting unit executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining unit determines the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting unit. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the special state is set based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio at which the special state is set can be varied by setting the type of the bonus game, and the shooting characteristics can be adjusted easily. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the second flow path is provided with a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the acquisition means is connected to the third ball entry means. The information is acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, and the determination means is a game rather than the determination based on the information acquired when a game ball has entered the third ball input means. An advantage determination that is advantageous to the user, and has a restricting means that can be varied between a state in which a game ball enters the third ball entry means and a state in which the ball is allowed to enter. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the special means is set so that the restricting means is easily changed to a state in which the ball is allowed to enter.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming ball is easy to enter the third entering means for executing an advantageous determination that is advantageous to the player when in a special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be urged to flow down to the second flow path to play the game.

  In the gaming machine C4, variable entry means that can be varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter, a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass, A bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and when the advantage determination determines a specific result, the variable pitching means is in a closed state. A gaming machine C5 that is variable to an open state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C4, the bonus game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow. There is an effect that the interest of the can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage unit capable of storing the information acquired based on a game ball entering the first ball entry unit, and the first storage unit store the information. Determination condition determination means for determining the information to be determined by the determination means based on the information, and the type determination means at least stores the information in the storage means during the bonus game. Determining a first type corresponding to a first privilege game that is easy to store, and a second type corresponding to a second privilege game that is more difficult to store the information in the storage means than the first type. Characteristic gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, depending on the type determined by the type determining unit, it is possible to execute a special game that makes it easy to store information in the first storage unit during a special game and a special game that is difficult to store. Thereby, when a special state is given after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to set a state where the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state where the identification information is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the special state, and the game executed during the special state can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means includes a first special state in which identification information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed during the special state; And a second special state in which identification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means is dynamically displayed, and the second special state is more game than the first special state. A game machine C7 that is characterized in that a privilege game advantageous to the user is easily executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information that is dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature D group> (Continuous mode end effect)
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. And a determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. Variable display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating and variable from a first state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state where a game ball can be entered. A variable setting means, a state setting means capable of setting a special state that can change the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special setting means by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period Release means for canceling the special state based on completion, and when the special state is set, dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the identification based on the remaining dynamic display period The game machine D1 has an effect execution means for executing an effect based on information determined to satisfy the condition.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the game is a win, a game that executes a win game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the display of the symbol variation based on the lottery result is repeated.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the remaining period of the special state varies with the elapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set, it is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. The establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state can be recognized, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The gaming machine D1 has a detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage area, and a determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. The game execution device D2 is characterized in that the effect execution means executes an effect for indicating the determination result based on the determination performed by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D1, even when identification information is displayed in a special state, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by passing the gaming ball through the passing area. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the fact that the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than a predetermined period. .

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state is equal to or less than the predetermined period by executing the specific effect. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination unit out of the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the game ball entering the second ball input unit. Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the previous information, and the effect executing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is less than or equal to the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the specific effect is not executed on the condition that it is stored.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, even if the special state is ended by storing information in the storage unit, it is based on the information stored in the storage unit. Therefore, since it is easy to make an advantageous determination, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player extra uneasiness by executing the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, second dynamic display means for displaying the result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means dynamically for a predetermined period, and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display means Period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at a time point when the result information is stopped and displayed, and the effect executing means has a predetermined period condition as a result of determination by the period determining means When the above condition is satisfied, the stop display mode of the result information is switched to the stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. An unexpected production can be provided to the person, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress the problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, making it difficult for the player to grasp the display contents. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to a person.

<Characteristic E group> (Changes to normal map change period in short-time state)
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. And a determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. It is easier to enter a game ball than the first state from the first state where it is difficult to enter the game ball in the second ball entry means and the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating. Variable means for changing to the second state, state setting means for setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and setting the state When the special state is set by means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Based on the end of the dynamic display period, a release means for releasing the special state and a lottery for determining whether to change the variable means from the first state to the second state are executed. A lottery means for displaying, a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing a lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the lottery information. A period determining unit, a storage unit storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining unit are stored, and the special unit set by the state setting unit A selection means for selecting a state type; and the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period based on the special state type set by the state setting means. Configuration Gaming machine E1, wherein the one having a dynamic display period group setting unit that, the.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the game is a win, a game that executes a win game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the display of the symbol variation based on the lottery result is repeated.

  According to the gaming machine E1, if the short dynamic display period of the lottery information is determined, the lottery can be executed in the period of the special state, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine E1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball entering the first entry means or the second entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. The game machine E2 is characterized in that the determination unit executes the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquisition unit can be stored in the storage unit, so that the player continues to the player regardless of the determination status of the determination unit. The game can be played and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the determination means performs the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E3, which is awaiting execution.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage unit is awaited. A plurality of determinations based on information stored in the means are not executed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has a detecting means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through a passing area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passing of the game ball by the detecting means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the lottery is executed on the basis of what has been done.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the lottery is executed by the lottery means when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed the passing area. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game using the game ball eagerly.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic set so that a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period. A gaming machine, characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the shorter dynamic display period is less likely to be determined than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is Can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means during a special state advantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on having entered the second ball entry means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that one dynamic display period is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second entry means in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it is possible to associate a game that causes a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machines E1 to E6 have notification means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notification means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the notifying means notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information is finished in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even if it is in the special state, the variable means does not change from the first state to the second state, and the player is distrusted by notifying the special state during the remaining period of the special state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling.

<Characteristic F group> (Production per special per hour)
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. And a determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is specific is stopped and displayed In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means, a variable means for changing the second ball entry means from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball can be entered. A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and a lottery by the lottery means The lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the lottery information for indicating the result, and the second means by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. A state setting unit capable of setting a special state that can be changed to a state, and when the special state is set by the state setting unit, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and Canceling means for canceling the special state based on the end of the target display period, and if the special state is not set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the special state And an effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information based on the fact that the effect execution means is selected when the special state is set. Of information Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the state of executing an effect corresponding to the representation in which the dynamic display specific conditions to effect corresponding to the identification information is performed by switching based on the satisfied.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the game is a win, a game that executes a win game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the display of the symbol variation based on the lottery result is repeated.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when it becomes a special state, it becomes easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entry means, so a specific lottery result that makes it easy to enter the second ball entry means Can be switched to the production corresponding to whether or not it will be, so that the player can be provided with the production corresponding to the information different in the special state and non-special state, so the game can be changed early, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of.

  In the gaming machine F1, information acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquisition means And a storage means for storing the acquired information.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, information acquired in the storage means even when a large number of gaming balls have entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Is stored, so that the player can have many opportunities to be determined.

  In the gaming machine F2, the determination means is based on the information acquired based on the fact that the second entry means stored in the storage means is entered based on the determination condition being satisfied. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the determination is executed in preference to the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the first entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on entering the second entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined. Can do. Therefore, the determination that is advantageous to the player can be executed continuously, and the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which the dynamic display is started is a predetermined period or less. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is set as at least one of the establishment conditions.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released There is an effect that it is possible to switch between the productions when it is smoothly released.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the specific condition is that the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed as identification information for indicating the specific determination result The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that being set as such is set as at least one of the conditions.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the identification information that is dynamically displayed is stopped with the identification information for indicating that it is a specific determination result, First, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is made, and the player is informed of whether the game ball is likely to enter the second entry means, and then a specific determination result. Can also be notified by the effect, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that effectively uses the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature G group> (Game support)
A ball entry means having an opening through which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closed state in which game ball entry is restricted A variable member that is variable, a determination unit that executes a determination based on the passage of the game ball, and a determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. And a variable control means for making the variable variable in a specific variable pattern, and the variable pattern enters the open state after the first open pattern that is in the open state, and through a closed pattern that is in a closed state for a predetermined period. A gaming machine G1 comprising at least a second opening pattern.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passing area through which a game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passing area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the lottery result is won. For example, there has been proposed one in which a variable member is made variable so that a sphere can easily enter a specific entrance. In such a gaming machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery is executed, and a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is known that the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with a symbol indicating the lottery result and the winning game is executed if the lottery result is successful (for example, JP 2012-147965 publication).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery because the display of the variation of the symbol based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like. It was.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by executing the first opening pattern. On the other hand, a game ball can enter the entrance means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G1, when a closing determination unit that determines that the closing pattern is executed among the variable patterns and the closing determination unit determines that the closing pattern has been executed, a predetermined first A gaming machine G2 comprising: a notification executing means for executing notification.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification execution means based on the execution of the first opening pattern and the execution of the closing pattern. The player can easily grasp that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G2, it has a game area in which the variable member is provided, and an operation means for launching a game ball in the game area, and the period set as the closing pattern among the variable patterns is: A gaming machine G3, characterized in that it is set longer than the period until the ball launched by the operating means reaches the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operating means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification executing means starts operating the operating means, the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed. It becomes possible to enter a ball into the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the game apparatus includes an end condition determining unit that determines that an end condition for ending the operation of changing the variable member by the variable control unit is satisfied, and the end condition determining unit A gaming machine G4 characterized in that when the predetermined variable pattern is executed, or when a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry means, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, an end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means. It is possible to finish the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern by causing the ball to enter the ball entry means. Thereby, since one variable control period can be shortened, it can make a player play a game eagerly. In addition, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, it is possible to establish a variable control end condition during the period in which the first variable pattern is being executed. There is an effect that the dissatisfaction caused by the long-term closing pattern being executed can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, the period set as the first release pattern among the variable patterns is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls launched by the operation means reach the variable member. A gaming machine G5, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be entered into the ball entry means during the period in which the first release pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction due to execution of a long-term closing pattern for a player who is playing a normal game.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second release pattern is being executed among the variable patterns, the notification execution means performs a predetermined second notification. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when a ball enters the ball entry means while the second release pattern is being executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G6, a gaming machine G7, wherein a period set as the first opening pattern among the variable patterns is shorter than a period set as the second opening pattern.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier for the ball entry means to enter the ball during the period when the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of short-time game)
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. And a determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. When the identification information for indicating is dynamically displayed and the identification information for indicating that it is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and lottery information for dynamically displaying lottery results by the lottery means. A first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the display means and the second entry means And when the lottery information for indicating that it is a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed to the second state. A state setting unit capable of setting a special state that can be changed to two states, and when the special state is set by the state setting unit, the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times. Release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the predetermined number of dynamic display periods, and when the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the special state, The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the stop display timing includes an effect execution means for executing an effect based on information corresponding to the period in which the special state is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the game is a win, a game that executes a win game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the display of the symbol variation based on the lottery result is repeated.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is executed based on the state set at the stop display timing of the lottery information that starts the dynamic display during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed by the effect It is possible to recognize the timing of the game, and it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and the special state is set based on the setting of the special state. A gaming machine H2 that is switched to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information and executed.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, the presentation is executed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the other than the special state, so that the player is provided with a different presentation, There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit include Storage means that is stored, and the determination means, based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, out of the information stored in the storage means, the second ball entry means to the game ball The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that determination is performed with priority on the information acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there are a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on entering the second entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined. can do. Therefore, the determination that is advantageous to the player can be executed continuously, and the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the undetermined information is stored in the storage means. Is a game machine H4 characterized by at least being set as a condition.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is stored in the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed because the determination condition is difficult to be satisfied. The player can have an opportunity to store information in the means, and the game can be efficiently performed.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, a restriction means for restricting that the information acquired based on entering the second entry means is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, when a special state is set, it is restricted that information acquired based on entering the second entering means is stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information acquired by entering the first entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. This makes it possible to delay the execution of such determination and increase the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the lottery information indicating that the variable member has the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed if the special state is set during the lottery period. A gaming machine H6 that is changed to the second state when played.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it can be changed to the second state based on the setting state of the special state in the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player Such a situation can be easily provided, and the interest of the player can be increased.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specification)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the information, and performing a first determination based on the information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means by the information acquisition means, Determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and the determination means A privilege display that gives a privilege when the identification information for indicating the determination result is dynamically displayed and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. And a game machine having a means before the second entry means. At least a setting is made by switching between a normal state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry means and a special state in which the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. State setting means capable of performing the identification information corresponding to the first determination as a release condition for releasing the special state when the special state is set by the state setting means The game machine I1 is configured to be able to individually set the number of dynamic display times and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the game is a win, a game that executes a win game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the display of the symbol variation based on the lottery result is repeated.

  According to the gaming machine I1, as the condition for releasing the special state, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set respectively. The expectation for executing the second determination can be varied and set. That is, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set, the player can have many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination. If the number of times of dynamic display is set to be large, the opportunity for executing the second determination can be set to be small, and the player's interest can be varied.

  The gaming machine I1 has storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means enters the second entry means out of the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquisition means is preferentially determined.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the judgment is executed with priority on information for which judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed continuously. It is easy to be played, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, a restriction unit that makes it difficult to store information acquired based on a game ball entering the second ball entry unit in the storage unit. A gaming machine I3 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically in the special display state when the special state is entered, There is an effect that advantageous determination can be easily performed continuously after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed by causing a game ball to enter the ball means and storing more information.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the release condition is configured such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is larger than the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I4, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to suppress the special state from being released only by performing the first determination that is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that the second determination that is advantageous to the player can be easily performed during the state.

  In the gaming machine I4, the release condition is set such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination is one.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I4, the number of times that the second determination advantageous to the player can be executed during the special state can be limited to one, so that an excessive benefit is given to the player. It has the effect that it can suppress giving to.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the storage means is configured to be capable of storing up to the upper limit number of the information.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the information for executing the second determination advantageous to the player can be stored up to the upper limit number, so that the special state ends. It is possible to execute the second determination even after the operation is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected even after the special state is finished.

  In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine I7, wherein a second upper limit number for the information acquired based on the information is set.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I6, information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entered the second ball entry means Since the upper limit number that can be stored with the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, regardless of the number of information stored It is possible to store up to the upper limit number of information acquired based on the game balls entering the second entrance means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game with the second ball entry means during the special state.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, variable entry means that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which entry is difficult, and a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass through. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the privilege granting means is configured to be able to grant a privilege when a game ball passes through the specific region.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a bonus is given by passing the game ball through a specific area, so the player is interested in the ball flow. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I8, the special state is set by the state setting unit after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, the gaming machine I9,

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I8, since a special state is set after the privilege is granted, it is possible to improve the gaming performance by allowing the gaming ball to pass through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means includes setting determination means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determination means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is performed by the determination means. A gaming machine I10 that determines whether or not to set the special state based on what is executed.

  According to the gaming machine I10, it is determined whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is granted at the timing when the determination by the determination unit is executed. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area, Whether the special state is set or not is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the timing for passing the game ball to the specific area.

  In the gaming machine I10, the gaming machine I11 has suggestion means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine I11, the suggestion means can recognize whether the special state is set after the privilege is granted, so that the game ball is passed to the specific area or the specific area is entered. There is an effect that the player can determine whether or not to play the game ball so as not to pass by referring to the content of the suggestion.

  In any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, the release condition is set such that the number of dynamic displays for the first identification information greater than the first upper limit number is set.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when the transition to the special state is made, the information already acquired for entering the first entering means is the first Even when the maximum number is stored, even if all the information is first determined and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the special state is not released, so there is an opportunity to execute the second determination in the special state. This can be given by the player, and has the effect of increasing the value of the special state for the player.

<Characteristics J group>
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. And a determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. Variable display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating and variable from a first state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state where a game ball can be entered. A variable setting means, a state setting means capable of setting a special state that can change the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special setting means by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period Based on the completion, the release means for releasing the special state, and after the special state is released by the release means, the special state is changed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is characterized by comprising: a determination means for determining whether the state setting means is set; and an effect execution means capable of changing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state in which a lottery probability after a winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping the display with the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the winning game is a win, a hit game is executed, and an effect is executed during the win game (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has been required to further enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is canceled, the effect is changed based on the information indicating whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. Whether or not a special state is continuously set can be identified from the production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the effect execution means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result based on the second determination.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, there is an effect that the expectation for the determination result of the second determination can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times that the special state is determined to be continuously set by the determining means. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set by the production is made identifiable, so not only the game hits the player but also the special state is set. It is possible to give interest to the number of times played and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machines J1 to J3, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, information for executing the first determination is acquired, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry means A game machine comprising: information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination; and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since it is stored, the opportunity determined by the determining means can be stored, and there is an effect that a lot of benefits can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine J4, the effect executing means is configured to be able to vary the effect based on the number of pieces of information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J4, the presentation varies depending on the number of pieces of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so information that is easily reserved by the player It is possible to notify the number of images and to increase the interest in the production.

<Feature K group>
A first determination is made based on a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. The determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamically displayed. And a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that it is the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The game machine K1 further includes state setting means for setting a game state advantageous to the player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the specific condition.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters the start opening provided in the gaming board, and a symbol for indicating the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is winning, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and according to the type of the winning game, a high probability state in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased is set, and the winning game continuously What is configured to be easily implemented has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the dynamic display period for indicating the lottery result is long, the number of lotteries to be drawn is reduced for the player, which is disadvantageous. The longer the dynamic display period, the more the player becomes bored. There was a problem that got bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that a player gets bored with a game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the player is in an advantageous state during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, the player is expected to execute the dynamic display having a long dynamic display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination with respect to the second determination, and that a game ball has entered the first entry means. Information acquiring means for acquiring information for executing the first determination based on the information, and acquiring information for executing the second determination based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means; Storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine K2 is configured to execute a determination on the information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, even if information is acquired during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the information is stored in the storage unit, so that the determination unit has more opportunities for determination. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, variable means for changing the second ball entry means from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter into a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and a lottery condition are established. A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the lottery information, and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. As an advantageous gaming state, when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable means can be changed to the second state. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in a special state, the gaming ball can be easily entered into the second entering means, and the gaming property can be varied. There is an effect that can be increased.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, A gaming machine K4 having release means for releasing a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set is completed. Since the game state is released, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the trouble that the player is bored can be suppressed even if a long dynamic display period is set. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the first incoming ball has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down. The means is disposed at the second flow path and at a position where at least a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means is disposed at the second flow path. A gaming machine K5, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even if the game ball is played to enter the second ball entry means, the game ball is moved to the first ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a state in which only the determination advantageous to the player is easily performed because the configuration is to enter the ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, there is an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information. A gaming machine K6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, if a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K6, the effect executed by the effect execution means includes an effect that prompts the game ball to enter the first entry means or the second entry means. A gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the first determination or the second determination is made by causing the gaming ball to enter the first entry means or the second entry means during a game state advantageous to the player. Since it is easy to give an opportunity to execute the determination, there is an effect that the game can be performed efficiently.

  Any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a Left first entrance (first entry means)
64b Right first entrance (first entrance means)
640 Second entrance (second entry means)
S109 privilege game execution means S402 determination means S406 dynamic display means S702, S708 acquisition means S710 storage means S1815 state setting means

Claims (4)

A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means,
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
A first determination is executed based on the information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means by the information acquisition means, and a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the information;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed,
A normal state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a game ball easier to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. State setting means capable of switching and setting at least a special state, and
When the special state is set by the state setting means, as a release condition for releasing the special state, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the second determination A gaming machine configured to be able to individually set the number of times of dynamic display of identification information. Storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
The determination means preferentially determines the information acquired by the information acquisition means based on having entered the second entry means among the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   When the special state is set, the storage means has a restricting means that makes it difficult to store information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.   The release condition is configured such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is greater than the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.

Images